Owner's Manual 7.A

'98 A 9,I owner's manual 7.A

PONTIiLC .VWE ARE DRIVING EXCITEMENT The 1998 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner’s Manual

1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells youhow to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains “SRS” the system. 2-1 Features and Controls This section explainshow to start and operate your vehicle. 3-1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells youhow to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. 4-1 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road how and to drive under different conditions. 5- 1 Problems on the Road This section tells what to doif you have a problem whiledriving, such asa flat tire or overheated engine, etc. 6-1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells youhow to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good. 7- 1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells youwhen to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. 8-1 Customer Assistance Information This section tellsyou how to contact Pontiacfor assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also givesyou information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page8-10. 9-1 Index Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subject in this manual.You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. i We support voluntary technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, WE SUPPORT PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN GRAND PRK are registered trademarksof General CERTIFICATION THROUGH Motors Corporation. National InatiMe for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE This manual includes the latest information at the timeit EXCELLENCE was printed. We reserve the right to make changesin the product after that time without further notice.For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Pontiac For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a Division whenever it appears in this manual. French Language Manual: Please keep this manual in your vehicle,so it will be Aux propriCtaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.If you procurer un exemplairede ce guide en franpis chez sell the vehicle, please leave this manualin it so the new votre concessionaire ou au: owner can useit. DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1577 Meyerside Dr. Mississauga, OntarioL5T 1B9

Litho inU.S.A. @Copyright GeneralMotors Corporation 1997 Part No. 10285608 B First Edition All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle.you If do this, it will help you learn about the features and These mean there is something that could hurt controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find you or other people. that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then Index we tell you what todo to help avoid or reduce the A good place to look for what you needis the Index in hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou don’t, you or back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in others could be hurt. the manual, and the page number where you’ll findit. You will also find a circle Safety Warnings and Symbols with a slash through itin this book. This safety You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. symbol means “Don’t,” We use a box and the word CAUTIONto tell you “Don’t do this” or “Don’t about things that could hurt youif you were to ignore let this happen.” the warning.

iii Vehicle Damage Warnings In the notice area,we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would Also, in this book you will find these notices: not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you whatto do to help avoid NOTICE: the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION These mean thereis something thatcould and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. damage your vehicle. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.

iv Vehicle Symbols These are someof the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some For example, These symbols other symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on these symbols warning and you may see: are used on an for you and your lamps: your controls: original battery: your passengers indicator lights: whenever your WINDSHIELD vehicle is WIPER CAUTION driven: POSSIBLE FUSE A COOLANT INJURY n TEMP - TURN PROTECT SIGNALS EYES BY UNLOCK Fol 6 BAllERY LIGHTER m SHIELDING CHARGING I-1 SYSTEM PARKING p$ LAMPS CAUSTIC I WINDSHIELD HORN FASTEN DEFROSTER tcr BRAKE SEAT (0) BELTS BURNS I h SPEAKER AVOID b SPARKS OR FLAMES ENGINE OIL PRESSURE FUEL e3 SPARK OR ,\I/, FLAME VENTILATING 1 COULD op AIR BAG p\ FOG LAMPS EXPLODE $0 BAllERY

V b NOTES

vi v Section 1 Seats andRestraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seatsin your Pontiac and how to use your safety belts properly. You canalso learn about some things you shouldnot do with air bags and safety belts.

1-2 Seats and Controls 1-33 RearSafety Belt Comfort Guidesfor 1-8 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone Children and Small Adults 1-12 Here Are Questions Many People Ask 1-35 Children About Safety Belts--and the Answers 1-38 Built-in Child Restraint (Option) 1-13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1-52 Child Restraints 1-14 Driver Position 1-65 Larger Children 1-21 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1-67 Safety Belt Extender 1-22 Right Front Passenger Position 1-68 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1-22 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 1-68 Replacing Restraint SystemParts 1-30 Rear Seat Passengers After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tellsyou how to adjust the seats and explains reclining seatbacks and headrestraints. 2-Way Manu4 Drive-Tassenger Seat

I A CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seatonly when Lift the lever under the front of the seat up, using a the vehicle is not moving. twisting motion. This will unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever.Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

1-2 6-Way Power Driver’s Seat (If Equipped) This switch is designed to control the movementsof your seat cushion. It is located on the leftof side the driver’s seat cushion.To move the seat forward or rearward, push the switch forward or rearward.To raise or lower the seat, push the switchor up down. To raise or lower the fiontportion of your seat,push the frontof 1the switch upor down. To raise or lower the rear portion of your seat, push the rear of the switchor updown.

1-3 2-Way Manual Lumbar (If Equipped) 4-Way Power Lumbar Driver's Seat (If Equipped) I

The knob that controls this featureis located on the right side of the driver's seat, about halfway down If you have this option, there will be a toggle switch on the seatback.Turn the knob clockwiseto increase the left sideof the driver's seat cushion, just in front of lumbar support. Turn the knob counterclockwise to the reclining seatback lever.To increase or decrease decrease lumbar support. lumbar support,push the switch forward or rearward. To adjust the lumbarsupport up or down, push the switch upor down.

1-4 Heated Seat (If Equipped) Reclining Front Seatbacks If your vehicle has this option, the switch is on the center console,just behind the open storage bin.

Press LO to warm the seatto a lower temperature. Press HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature.To turn this feature off, place the switch in the center position. Lift the lever to release the seatback, then movethe seatback to whereyou want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback in place. Pull up theon lever without pushing on the seatback, and the seatback will move forward.

1-5 Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Evenif you buckle up, your safety belts can’tdo their job when you’re reclined like this. The shoulder belt can’tdo its job because it won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could goup over your abdomen. The belt forces wouldbe there, notat your pelvic bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries. But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle For properprotection when the vehicle is in is moving. motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

Head Restraints Slide the head restraint upor down so that the topof the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chanceof a neck injuryin a crash.

1-6 Seatback Latches (2-Door Models) After someone gets intothe rear seat area, movethe right front seatback to its original position. Then move the seat rearward until it locks. To get out, tilt the seatback fully forward.

A CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move forward in a sudden stopor crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

On two-door models, the right front seat is designed to make it easy to get inand out of the rear seat. Tilt the right seatbackfully forward, The whole seatwill now slide forward.If the seatwill not tilt,lift the seatback latch, locatedon the back of the seat totilt the seatback forward. The whole seat will now slide forward.

1-7 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts A CAUTION: properly. It also tells yousome things you should not do with safety belts. It is extremely dangerousto ride in a cargo area, And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, (SRS), or air bag system. people riding in theseareas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Besure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a Don’t let anyoneride where heor she can’t wear safety belt properly. a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and you’re not wearinga safety belt, yourinjuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash,you might not be ifyou are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.

1-8 Your vehicle has a light Why Safety Belts Work that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety When you ride in or on anything, yougo as fast as Belt Reminder Light” in it goes. the Index.)

In most states and Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work. A

You never knowif you’ll be in a crash.If you do have a 1 crash, you don’t knowif it will be a bad one. .‘a A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckledup a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between.In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes bucklingup does matter ... a lot! Take the simplest vehicle.Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-9 Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.

1-10 F I r I

The person keeps goinguntil stopped by something. or the instrument panel .. . In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-11 Here Are Questions ManyPeople Ask About Safety Belts-- and the Answers

”- @ Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle afteran accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. Butyou can unbucklea safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if you are belted. If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags arein many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are or the safety belts! supplemental systems only;so they work with With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag You get more time to stop.You stop over more distance, system ever offeredfor sale has required the useof and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that airhas safety belts make such good sense. bags, you still have to buckleup to get the most protection. That’s true not onlyin frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

1-12 &: If I’m a good driver, andI never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly home, why shouldI wear safety belts? Adults A: You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re in an accident -- even one that isn’t your fault-- you and This part is onlyfor people of adult size. your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver Be aware that there are special thingsto know about safety doesn’t protect youfrom things beyond your belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller control, such as bad drivers. children and babies.If a child willbe riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. home. And the greatest numberof serious injuries and deaths occurat speeds of less than40 mph First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. (65 kmlh). We’ll start with the driver position. Safety beltsare for everyone.

1-13 Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the beltacross you. Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt maylock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Thenpull the belt across you more slowly.

1-14 4. Push the latch plate intothe buckle until it clicks. hllup on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever hadto.

The lap part of the belt shouldbe worn low and snug on the hips, just touching thethighs. In a crash, this applies force to thestrong pelvic bones. And you’dbe less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen,This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt resb.aining forces. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle The safety belt locks if there’s a suddenstop or crash, or end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. if you pullthe beltvery quickly outof the retractor. 1-15 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster (4-Door Models) To move it down, squeeze the releaselever and move Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt the height adjusterto the desired position.You can move the adjuster upjust by pushing up the adjuster to the height thatis right for you. on shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you wantit, try to move it down without squeezing the release lever to make sure ithas locked into position. Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder.

1-16 &: What’s wrong with this? A CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt istoo loose. It won’t give nearly as much protectionthis way.

1-17 @ What’s wrong with this? A CAUTION: - You can be seriously injured if your beltis buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-18 What’s wrong with this? A CAUTION: You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash,your body would move toofar forward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t asstrong as shoulderbones. You could also severelyinjure internal organs like your liveror spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-19 @ What's wrong with this?

You can be seriously injured bya twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn't have the full widthof the belt to spread impact forces.a Ifbelt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, orask your dealer tofix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door,be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should beworn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

1-21 The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the Here are the most important things knowto about the air mother. When a safety belt isworn properly, it’s more bag system: likely that the fetus won’t be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making ’ safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly. A CAUTION: I Right Front PassengerPosition You can be severelyinjured or killed in a crash if To learn how to wear the right fiont passenger’s safety belt you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you properly, see “Driver Position” earlier inthis section. have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameas waycrash helps reduce your chance of hitting things the driver’s safetybelt -- except for one thing.If you ever pull inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will are %pplemental restraints” to the safety belts. engage the child restraintlocking feature. If this happens, just All air bags -- even reduced-force air bags -- are let the belt go backall the way and start again. designed to work with safety belts, but don’t Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the frontof This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed or air bag system. (SRS) to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed Your vehicle has “Next Generation” reduced-force frontal crashes. And, for unrestrainedoccupants, frontal air bags -- one air bag for the driver and another reduced-force air bags may provide less protection air bag for the right front passenger. in frontal crashes than more forcefid air bags have Reduced-force fiontal air bags are designed to help reduce provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle the risk of injury fromthe force of an inflating air bag. But should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or even these air bags must inflate very quickly if they are to not there’s an air bag for thatperson. do their job and comply with federal regulations. A CAUTION: CAUTION: (Continued) Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its Air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the airbag system is designed forthem. Young blink of an eye. If you’re too close to aninflating children and infantsneed the protectionthat a air bag, it could seriously injure you. This is true child restraint system can provide. Always secure even with reduced-force frontal airbags. Safety children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, belts help keep you in position before and during see the partof this manualcalled “Children” and a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the reduced-force air bags. The drivershould sit as right frontpassenger’s safety belt. far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument /I\ CAUTION: panel, which showsSRS SRS AIR BAG AIRBAG. Children who are upagainst, or very close to, an air bag when it inflatescan be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has reduced-force frontal air bags. Air bags plus The system checks the air bag electrical system for lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for malfunctions. The light tells youif there is an electrical adults, but not foryoung children and infants. problem. See “AirBag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. CAUTION: (Continued)

1-23 How the Air Bag System Works

The right front passenger'sair bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side. Where are theair bags? The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-24 it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.If your vehicle strikes something thatwill move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed inflateto in rollovers, side If something is between an occupant and an air impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not bag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it help the occupant. might force the object into that person. The path In any particular crash, noone can say whether an air , of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t bag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage put anything between an occupant andan air to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were. bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the Inflation is determinedby the angle of the impact and steering wheel hub or on or near any other air how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontalor bag covering. near-frontal impacts. What makesan air bag inflate? When should an air bag inflate? In an impact of sufficient severity,the air bag sensing An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe system detects that the vehicleis in a crash.The sensing frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed inflates the air bag.The inflator, air bag and related “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is steering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24km/h). The threshold level the right front passenger. can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so that

1-25 How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the I instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection When an air bag inflates, there is dust thein air. provided by safety belts.Air bags distribute the force of This dust could cause breathing problems for the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, people with a historyof asthma or other stopping the occupant more gradually. Butair bags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe to doso. an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air If you have breathing problems but can’t get out bags should never be regarded as anythmg more than a of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to fresh air by opening a window or door. severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. What will you see after an air bag inflates? In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. some people may noteven realize the air bag inflated. Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the Some components of the air bag module -- the steering right front passenger air bag. wheel hub for the driver’sair bag, or the instrument panel Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they for the right front passenger’s bag-- will be hot for a short inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your airbag time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you system. If you don’t get them,the air bag system may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be won’t be there to help protectyou in another crash. some smoke and dust comingfrom vents in the deflated A new system will include air bag modules and air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driverfrom possibly other parts. The service manual for your seeing or from being ableto steer the vehicle, nordoes it vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. stop people from leaving the vehicle.

1-26 0 Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and If your vehicle ever getsinto a lotof water -- such as diagnostic module, which records information about water up to the carpetingor higher -- or if water enters the air bag system. The module records information your vehicle andsoaks the carpet, theair bag controller about the readinessof the system, when the sensors can be soaked and ruined.If this ever happens, and then are activated and driver’s safety belt usage at you start your vehicle, the damage could make airthe deployment. bags inflate, evenif there’s no crash.You would have to replace the bags as well asthe sensors and related 0 Let only qualified technicians work on your bag air air parts. If your vehicleis ever in aflood, or if it’s exposed system. Improper service can mean that yourair bag system won’t work properly.See your dealer to water that soaks thecarpet, you can avoid needless for service. repair costsby turning off the vehicle immediately. Don’t let anyonestart the vehicle, even totow it, unless the battery cables arefist disconnected. NOTICE: Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not There are partsof the air bag system in several places work properly. You may have to replace the air around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.Your bag modulein the steering wheelor both the air dealer and the GrandPrix Service Manual have bag module and the instrument panel for the information about servicing your vehicle and theair bag right front passenger’s air bag.Do not open or system. To purchase a service manual,see “Service and break the air bag coverings. Owner Publications” in the Index.

1-27 Center Passenger Position A CAUTION:

For up to10 minutes after theignition key is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air bag can still inflateduring improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are U probably part of the air bagsystem. Be sure to i3 follow proper service procedures, and makesure Lap Belt the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so. If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit in the center position.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-28 When you sit in a center seating position, you havea lap To make the belt shorter, pull itsfree end as shown until safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt the belt is snug. longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. Buckle, position and releaseit the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure the release button on the buckleis positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-29 Rear Seat Passengers It’s very importantfor rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. Lap-Shoulder Belt The shoulder beltmay lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt acrossyou belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. more slowly.

1-30 2. Push thelatch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sureit is secure. When the shoulder belt is pulled outall the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go all back the way andstart again. If the belt is not long enough,see “Safety Belt Extendef’ at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever hadto.

I A CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderis belt too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-32 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guidesfor Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints andfor small adults. When installedon a shoulder belt,the comfort guide pullsthe belt away from the neck and head. There is one guidefor each outside passenger positionin the rear seat.To provide added safetybelt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints andfor smaller adults,the comfort guides may be installedon the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cordout from between the edge of the seatback and theinterior body to remove the guide from its storageclip. 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic 3. Be sure that the beltis not twisted andit lies flat. cord mustbe under the belt. Then, place the guide The elastic cord mustbe under the beltand the guide over the belt, and insert the two edgesof the belt into on top. the slotsof the guide.

1-34 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smallerthan adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age sizeand of the traveler changes the need,for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States andin every Canadian provincesays children up to some age must be restrained while ina vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies

A CAUTION:

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any air bagwhen it inflates can beseriously injured 4. Buckle, position and release the safety beltas or killed. This is true even though yourvehicle described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” has reduced-force frontal air bags. Air bags plus earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for belt crossesthe shoulder. adults, but not for young children infants.and To remove and store thecomfort guides, squeeze the belt Neither thevehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air edges together so that you can take them outfrom the bag system is designed for them. Young children @des. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and infantsneed the protection that a child and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and restraint system canprovide. Always secure clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior children properly in yourvehicle. body, leaving only theloop of elastic cord exposed. 1-35 Infants need completesupport, including supportfor the head and neck.This is necessary because an infant’s ,& CAUTION: neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a Smaller children and babies shouldalways be rear-facing restraint settlesinto the restraint, so the crash restrained in achild or infant restraint. The forces canbe distributed across the strongestpart of the instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is infant’s body, the back and shoulders.A baby should be the right type andsize for yourchild. A very secured in an appropriate infant restraint.This is so young child’s hip bones are so small that a important that many hospitals today won’t release a regular belt might notstay low on the hips,as it newborn infant to its parents unless thereis an infant should. Instead, the beltwill likelybe over the restraint availablefor the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle. child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force right on thechild’s abdomen, which could cause seriousor fatalinjuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one isalways properly restrained ina child or infant restraint.

1-36 at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 2404b. (110 kg) force on your arms. The babywould be almostimpossible to hold. Secure the baby inan infant restraint. I 1

Never hold a baby in yourarms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a babywill become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash

CAUTION: (Continued) I Built-in Child Restraint (Option) This child restraintis designed for use only by children who weigh between22 and 60 pounds (10 and 27 kg) and whose height is between 33.5 and 51 inches (850 and 1 295 mm) and who are capableof sitting upright alone. The child shouldalso be at least one year old. isIt important to use a rear-facing infant restraint until the child is about a year old. A rear-facing restraint gives the infant’s head, neck and body the support they would need in a crash. See “Child Restraints”later in this section for more information.

If your vehicle has this option, there’sa built-in child restraint in the center rear seat position.This child restraint system conforms toall applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

1-38 @ Which slots shouldI use for my child? A: With the child seatedon the child restraint cushion, use the pairof slots that is at justor above the top of the child’s shoulders.

With this built-in child restraint,you can adjust the height of the harness. Depending on the seated height of the child, you can routeit through the upper pair of I slots (A), the middle pairof slots (B) or the lower pair of slots (C). For the child shown here,the harness should go through the middle pairof slots (B).

1-39 @ What if the topof my child’s shoulders is above Adjusting the Harness Height the highest pairof slots? A: A child whose shoulders are above the highest slots shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead, the child should sit on the vehicle’s seat cushion and use the vehicle’s safety belts.

A CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE TOP OF THE CHILD’S SHOULDERS Is BELOW THE SLOTS THAT THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH.A CHILD WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE ABOVE THOSE SLOTS COULD BEINJURED DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. IF’ THE TOP OF THE CHILD’S SHOULDERS IS ABOVE THE SLOTS, DON’T USE THIS CHILD 1. Lower the child restraintcushion. RESTRAINT. INSTEAD, THE CHILD SHOULD SIT ON THE VEHICLE’S REGULAR SEAT AND USE THE REGULAR SAFETY BELTS.

1-40 2. If the left and right halves of the shoulder harness 3. If the lap-shoulder harness is buckled, unlatch it by clip are fastened together, separate them. pushing the buttonon the buckle.

1-41 4. Pull down the seatback part of the pad (D). 5. Select one side of the harness. Add some slack to the shoulder part by pulling up on the lap part. You'll keep most of this slack until you finish Step 9.

1-42 F

6. Feed a small amount of harness slack back into 8. Move the harness up or down to the correct slot. The the slot. correct slotis the one that will beat or just above the top of the child’s shoulder. 7. Twist the harness slightly to remove it from theslot.

1-43 10. Pull on the harness. Make sureit is properly routed and isn’t twisted or flipped over. 11. Repeat Steps 5 through 10 for the other side o€ the harness. Be sure both sides are adjusted to the same height. 12. Move the pad back againstthe child restraint seatback. Make sure the harness goes throughthe slots in the pad that matchthe height adjustment slots being used. 13 Press the upper edgeof the pad against the fastener strip.

9. Twist the harness slightly to route it through the correct slot.

1-44 Securing a Child in theBuilt-in Child Restraint

Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts ona child seated on the child restraint cushion cancause serious injury to the child ina sudden stopor crash. If a child is theproper size for the built-in child restraint, secure the child using the child restraint’s harness. But childrenwho are too large forthe built-in childrestraint should sit on the vehicle’s regular seat and use the regular safety belts.

WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOWTHE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMCAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN Now that the harnessis adjusted to the correct height STOP OR CRASH. for your child, you’re readyto use the child restraint’s SNUGLY ADJUST THE BELTS PROVIDED WITH harness (E) to secure your child. THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD. Don’t use the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-45 1. If the left and right halvesof the shoulder harness 2. If the lap-shoulder harnessis buckled, unlatchit by clip are fastened together, separate them. pushing the button on the buckle. 3. Place the childon the child restraint cushion.

1-46 5. Push the latch plate(F) into the buckle until it clicks. Be sure the buckle isfree of any foreign objects that may prevent you from securing the latch plates.If you can’t securea latch plate, see your dealer for service before using the child restraint. 6. In a single motion, pull the other sideof the harness all the way out. Keeping the harness pulled all the way out, placeit over the child’s shoulder.

4. Select only one sideof the harness. Pull the lap part of the harness out, and place the harness theover child’s shoulder. If both sidesof the harness are pulled out, lapthe parts will lock.If the lap parts lock,let both sides of the harness go back all theway so each side will move freelyagain. Then repeatthis step, pulling only one sideof the harness out. 7. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 8. Now fasten the leftand right halvesof the shoulder Pull on both latch plates to make sure they are secure.A harness clip together. The indicator window (H) on green indicator will show in each latch plate window(G). the clip will show green when the two halves are fastened together. The purposeof this clip is to help If the harness locks before the latch plate reaches the keep the harness positionedon the child’s shoulders. buckle, let the harnessgo all the way backso it will move freely again. Then repeat Steps6 and 7. Be sure tokeep the harness pulled all the way out until you buckleit. Once both sidesof the lap-shoulder harness are pulled out of the retractor and buckled, the harness will lock. 1-48 An unfastened shoulder harness clip won’t help keep theharness in place on the child’s shoulders. If the harness isn’t onthe child’s shoulders,it won’t be able to restrainthe child’s upper body in a sudden stop or crash. The child could be seriously injured. Make sure the harness clip is properly fastened.

9. On both sidesof the harness, pullup on the lap parta little to be sure it’s locked. If the harness isn’t locked, ifor it becomes too tight, unfasten the harness clip. Then unlatch the harness by pushing the buttonon the buckle,and let both sides of the harness goall the way back so they will move freely again. Then, repeatSteps 4 through 8. If the harness still doesn’t lock, don’t use the child restraint. See your dealer to have the built-in child restraint serviced. 1-49 10. Adjust the position of the harness on the child’s shoulders by moving the clip upor down along the harness. On each side of the harness, the shoulder part should be centered on the child’s shoulder. The 1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip. harness should be away from the child’s face and neck, but not fallingoff the child’s shoulders.

1-50 Storing the Built-in Child Restraint Always properly store the built-in child restraint before using the vehicle’s lap beltin the center rear seat position. 1. Buckle the harness and fasten the harness clip.

2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button on the buckle. 3. Move one side of the harness off the child’s shoulder, and let the harnessgo all the way back. 4. Move the other sideof the harness off the child’s shoulder, and letit go all the way back. 2. Fold the child restraint cushionand leg rest up into the seatback. 5. Remove the childfiom the child restraint cushion. 3. Press the child restraint cushionfirmly into the seatback. 1-51 Child Restraints Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they shouldhave protection providedby appropriate restraints. @’ What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selectinga child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

4. Then press the leg restfirmly into the seatback,and secure itby pressing the upper comers against the fastener strips on the seatback. Just like the other restraint systems in your vehicle, your built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked and may needto have parts replacedafter a crash. See “Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat and Restraint SystemParts After a Crash” in the Index.

1-52 An infant car bed (A) is a special bed madefor use A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant designed to restrain or position a child on a restraints are designed for infantsof up to about continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, 20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one yearof age. This type make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe of restraint faces therear so that the infant’s head, center of the vehicle. neck and body can have the support they need ain crash. Someinfant seats come in two parts -- the base stays secured inthe vehicle and the seat part is removable. 1-53 1-54 A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These forward-facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear-facing infant seat or a forward-facing child seat. When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying thatit meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint.You may find these instructions on the restraint itselfor in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt systemin your vehicle, but the childalso has to be secured within the restraint tohelp reduce the chanceof personal injury. The instructions that come with the infantor child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraintinstructions are important, so if either oneof these is not available, obtaina replacement copy fromthe manufacturer. Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they A booster seat (F, G) is designed for childrenwho are are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.We at about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about four to General Motors therefore recommend that you put your eight years of age. It’s designedto improve thefit of child restraintin the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing the vehicle’s safety belt system.Booster seats with child restraintin the front passengerseat. Here’s why: shields use lap-only belts; however, boosterseats without shields use lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.

1-56 I A CAUTION: A CAUTION: A child in a rearfacing child restraint can be A child ina child restraint in thecenter front seat seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s air can be badly injured or killed by the right front bag inflates, even though your vehicle has passenger air bag if it inflates, even though your reduced-force frontal air bags. This is because vehicle has reduced-forcefrontal airbags. Never the backof the rear-facing child restraint would secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. be very closeto the inflatingair bag. Always It’s alwaysbetter to securea child restraint in the secure a rearfacing child restraint in a rear seat. rear seat. You may secure a forward-facing child You may secure a forward-facing child restraint restraint in the right front passenger seat,but in the rightfront seat, but before you do, always before you do, always movethe front passenger move the front passenger seatas far back as it seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure will go. It’s better to secure the childrestraint in the child restraint in a rear seat. a rear seat. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle-- even when no childis in it. Top Strap If your child restraint hasa top strap, your dealer can obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation instructions specifically designedfor this vehicle. The dealer can then install the anchorfor you. In Canada, this work will be donefor you free of charge. Or, you may install the anchor yourself using the instructions provided in the kit. Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position

If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part anchored. If you need to havean anchor installed,you about the topstrap if the child restraint has one. Besure can ask your Pontiac dealer to putit in for you. If you to follow the instructions that came with the child want to installan anchor yourself, your dealer can tell restraint. Secure the childin the child restraint when and you how to do it. as the instructions say. Canadian law requires that child restraints havea top 1. Put the restraint on the seat. strap, and that the strap be anchored.

1-58 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’sface or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Pull the restof the shoulder belt allthe way out of L the retractor to setthe lock.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 1-59 To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let goit back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to workfor an adult or larger child passenger. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap belt. Besure to follow the instructions that came-with the child restraint.Secure the 5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the child the child restraint when and the instructions retractor while you push down on the child restraint.If in as say. you’re usinga forwk-d-facing child restmint, you may find it helpful to useyour knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

1-60 A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badlyinjured orkilled by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates, even though your vehicle has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It’s alwaysbetter to securea child restraint in the rear seat. You may secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat,but before you do, always move thefront passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. I I See the earlier part aboutthe top strap if the child 1. Make the belt as longas possible by tiltingthe latch restraint has one. plate and pullingit along the belt. 2. Put the restraint on theseat. 3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions willshow you how.

1-61 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sureit is secure. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to workfor an adult or larger child passenger. Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is Your vehicle has a rightfront passenger air bag. Never positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint.If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may findit helpful to use yourknee to push downon the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

1-62 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. A child in a rearfacing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or passenger’s air bag inflates,even though your neck, put it behind the child restraint. vehicle has reducedlforcefrontal air bags. This is because the backof the rearfacing child restraint would be very closeto the inflatingair bag. Alwayssecure a rearfacing child restraint in the rear seat.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the topstrap if the child restraint has one.Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the childin the child restraint when and as the instructionssay. 1. Because your vehicle hasa right front passenger air bag, always move the seat asfar back as it will go before securinga forward-facing child restraint. (See “Seats” in the Index.) 2. Put the restraint on theseat. 4. Buckle the belt. Makesure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quicklyif you ever hadto. 1-63 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all theway out of 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the the retractor to set the lock. retractor while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and letit go back all the way. Thesafety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-64 Children who have outgrown child restraints should Larger Children wear the vehicle’s safetybelts. If you have the choice,a child should sit next toa window so the childcan wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide. Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. 0 Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash. 0 Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.

1-65 Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properlyspread the impact forces.In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be usedby only one personat a time.

&: What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt, but the child isso small that the shoulder belt is very close tothe child’s faceor neck? A: Move the child toward the centerof the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.If the child is sittingin a rear seatoutside position, see “Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides’’ in the Index. If the child isso small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’sface or neck, you might want to place the child in the center seat position, the one that has onlya lap belt.

1-66 I A CAUTION: I Never do this. Here a child is sittingin a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt,but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wearsthe belt in thisway, in a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips,just touching the child’s thighs.This applies beltforce to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Safety BeltExtender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should useit.

1-67 But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is tom or dealer will order youan extender. It’sfree. When you go frayed, geta new harness right away. in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the Also lookfor any opened or broken air bag covers, and extender willbe long enough for you. The extender will have them repairedor replaced. (Theair bag system be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that does not need regular maintenance.) you choose. Don’t let someoneelse use it, and useit only for the seat it is madeto fit. To wear it, just attach it Replacing Restraint System Parts to the regular safety belt. After a Crash Checking Your Restraint Systems If you’ve hada crash, do you need new safety belts or Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light built-in child restraint parts? and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand After a very minor collision, nothingmay be necessary. anchorages are working properly.If your vehicle hasa But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the straps were stretched,as they would be if worn during a harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and more severe crash, thenyou need new safety beltsor anchorages are working properly. Look forany other harness straps. loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts. If you see anything that might keepa If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also its job, have it repaired. may mean you will need tohave safety belt, built-in child restraintor seat parts repaired or replaced. New Torn or frayed safety belts maynot protect you ina parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is or built-in childrestraint wasn’t being used at thetime torn or frayed, geta new one right away. of the collision. If your vehiclehas the built-in child restraint,torn or If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replaceair bag frayed harness strapscan rip apart under impact forces system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier just like tom or frayed safety beltscan. They may not in this section. 1-68 Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn aboutthe many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking.Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everythingis working properly -- and what todo if you havea problem.

2-2 Keys 2-3 1 Parking Over Things That Burn 2-4 Door Locks 2-3 1 Engine Exhaust 2-7 Remote Keyless Entry System (If Equipped) 2-32 Running Your Engine WhileYou’re Parked 2- 12 TrUnk 2-33 Power Windows 2-13 Theft 2-34 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever 2-14 Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped) 2-40 Exterior Lamps 2- 16 New Vehicle “Break-In” 2-42 Interior Lamps 2-16 Ignition Positions 2-45 Locks and Lighting Choices 2- 17 Starting Your Engine 2-52 Mirrors 2-20 Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped) 2-54 Storage Compartments 2-2 1 Automatic Transaxle Operation 2-59 Sunroof (If Equipped) 2-26 Parking Brake 2-60 The Instrument Panel-- Your 2-27 Shifting IntoPARK (P) Information System 2-30 Shifting Out of PARK (P) 2-64 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

2-1 Keys I A CAUTION:

Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerousfor many reasons.A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windowsor other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys ina vehicle with young children.

2-2 The master key can be used When a new vehicleis delivered, it will come witha bar for the ignition, as well coded tag attached to the key ring. as all door locks and This tag has a code onit that tells your dealer ora storage compartments. qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the code ina safe place.If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using this code. If you need a new ignition key, contact your dealer who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the pre-cut emergency key which Pontiac sends after delivery. (This service is not availablein Canada.) In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1-800-ROADSIDE or 1-800-762-3743. (In Canadacall The valet key can be used 1-800-268-6800.) for the ignition and the two I 1 side doors only. It will not open the trunk, glove box or I NOTICE: ~~ I fold down rear seattrunk access panel (if equipped). Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft. But you can have aof lot trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside.You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in.So be sure you have extra keys.

2-3 Door Locks You can lock either front doorfrom outside the vehicle with your keyby inserting it fully into the door key 1 cylinder andturning it toward the rear. I A CAUTION: Unlocked doors canbe dangerous. Passengers -- especially children-- can easily open thedoors and fall out. Whena door is locked, the insidehandle won’t open it. Outsiders can easilyenter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrownout of the vehicle ina crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive yourvehicle. To unlock either front door from inside the vehicle, push the lock lever forward. There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. To lock either frontdoor from inside the vehicle, push Front Door the lock lever back. To unlock either front door from outside the vehicle with your key, insert it fully into the doorkey cylinder and turn it toward the front. Rear Doors You can lock all doorsfrom inside the vehicleby pressing the rearof the power lock switch on either front To unlock either rear door from insidethe vehicle, push door. If your vehicle is equipped with a Content the lock lever forward. Theft-Deterrent system,the power lock switch may To lock either rear door from inside the vehicle, push thecause the system toarm (see “Content Theft-Deterrent” lock lever back. in the Index for more details). Power Door Locks To unlock any door from outside the vehicle with your key, insertit fully into the key cylinderand turn it to the Iunlock position. This will cause only the door you are operating to be unlocked. If your vehicle is equipped with Content Theft-Deterrent, you can unlock all doors by holding the key cylinderin the unlock positionfor one second. Lockout Deterrent The Lockout Deterrent feature makes it difficult for you to lock your keysin your vehicle. If the driver’s door is open while the keys are thein ignition, you will not be able to use your power door locks. This feature cannot guarantee that you’ll never be locked out of your vehicle. If you don’t leave the keys in To unlock all dour-s from inside the vehicle, pressthe the ignition, or if you used the manual door lock, you front of the power door lock switch on either front door. could still lock your keys inside your vehicle, Always If your vehicle is equipped with a Content remember to take yourkeys with you. Theft-Deterrent system, the power door lock switch will not unlock the doors untilthe system is disarmed.See “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for more details. 2-5 To turn this feature onor off, see “Locks and Lighting Automatic Door Locks Choices” in the Index. All of the doors will lock automaticallywhen you move Last Door Closed Locking your shift lever out of PARK(P). All doors will unlock automatically when the ignitionis turned off while the The Last Door Closed Locking feature makesit more shift lever is in PARK (P). If you prefer to have your convenient for you to use your power door locksto lock doors unlocked automatically atany time, see “Locks all the doors when leavingyour vehicle. When any door is and Lighting Choices” in the Index. open, the first time you attempt to lockthe doors using the power door lock switchor remote remote keyless entry If someone needsto get in or out of the vehicle after the transmitter will resultin three chimes to signal that Last doors have been automatically locked, then place the Door Closed Locking feature is being used.All doors can shift lever into PARK(P). Unlock all doors by using the be opened for any reason for five seconds from the time power door lock switchor unlock just the door you want the last door has been closed. Five secondsafter the last by using the inside lever. If you have programmed your door is closed, all doors will lock. You can lock the doors automatic door locks (see “Locks and Lighting Choices’’ immediately by using the power door lock switchor the in the Index) to unlock the doors when the shift leveris remote keyless entry transmitter. shifted into PARK (P), then thedoors will be automatically unlocked for you. The doors will The Last Door Closed Locking feature will not occur automatically lock whenyou move your shift leverout and doors will not be lockedas a result of this feature of PARK (P) with the ignition on. when the ignition switch is in RUNor ACCESSORY. The Last Door Closed Locking featureis not enabled If you don’t want the doors to unlock automatically from the factory. when you turn the ignitionoff, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. To turn the Last Door Closed Locking feature onoff, or see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

2-6 Rear Door Security Locks (4-Door Models) Leaving Your Vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with rear doorsecurity locks that If you are leaving the vehicle, takeyour keys, openyour help prevent passengers from opening the rear doorsof door and setthe locks from inside. Then get out and your vehicle from the inside. To use one of these locks: close the door. 1. Open one of the Remote Keyless Entry System rear doors. (If Equipped) 2. On the insideof the rear If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock door will be a lock. your doors or unlock yourtrunk from about 3 feet (1 m) Insert your master key up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry into this lock andturn transmitter supplied with your vehicle. it counterclockwise. This will engage the Your remote keylessentry system operates on a radio safety lock. frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 3. Close the door. (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, 4. Do the same thing tothe other rear door lock. including interference that may cause The rear doorsof your vehicle cannot be opened from undesired operation. the inside when this feature inis use. If you want to open the rear door whenthe security lock is on, unlock the door fromthe inside and then open the door from the outside. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operationof the device. Changes or modifications to this systemby other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. This system has a rangeof about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keylessentry system. If the transmitter does not work ifor you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: 3-Button Key Fob 4-Button KeyFob Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions that follow. Remote All Door Lock 0 Check the distance. You may be too far from your To lock all doors, press LOCK onthe remote keyless vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy entry transmitter (see “Power Door Locks” the in Index or snowy weather. for more details on powerdoor lock features). If your Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be vehicle is equipped with the Content Theft-Deterrent blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or system, theLOCK button may arm the system right, hold the transmitter higher,and try again. (see “Content Theft-Deterrent” inthe Index for more details). If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service. 2-8 1~ r: 3te Driver’s Door and All Door Unlock Remote Alarm (If Equipped) When you pressUNLOCK on the remote keyless entry When you press the horn button on the remote keyless transmitter, only the driver’s doorwill unlock. If you entry transmitter, your vehicle’s headlampswill flash press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all the doors and the horn will sound.This will allow you to attract will unlock. If you would like all doors to unlock the attention, if needed. first time you press UNLOCK, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote LocWnlock Confirmation (If Equipped) the Content Theft-Deterrent system, theUNLOCK This feature provides feedback to the holderof the button on the remote keyless entry transmitterwill remote keyless entry transmitter thata command has disarm the system (see “Content Theft-Deterrent”in been receivedby the keyless entry receiver.To signal the Index for more details). that a command has been received, the headlamps will flash and the hornwill sound briefly. To programthe Remote Trunk Release various modes available,see “Locks and Lighting Press the trunk symbol on your remote keyless entry Choices” inthe Index. transmitter to open yourtrunk. The transaxle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to operate.

2-9 Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitteris coded to I NOTICE: prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter islost or stolen, a replacement can be When replacing the battery, use care not to touch purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any any of the circuitry. Static from your body remaining transmitters withyou when you go toyour transferred to these surfaces may damage dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement the transmitter. transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it. Battery Replacement Under normal use, the batteryin your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years. You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal rangein any location. Ifyou have to get closeto your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.

2-10 5. Check the transmitter operation.If needed, follow the instructions on resynchronizing your remote keyless entry transmitter. .“‘- Resynchronizing Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Your remote keyless entry system uses a continually changing code for increased security. Normally, the receiver in your vehicle will keep trackof this changing code. Loss of synchronization will occurif the transmitter is activated more than256 times while outof range of the vehicle. 0 Loss of synchronization will occur after battery To replace- your battery: replacement if the transmitter is immediately 1. Insert aflat object like a dime intothe slot on activated more than16 times while outof range of the side of the transmitter and twistto separate the vehicle. the halves. If your remote keyless entry transmitter has stopped working, 2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter.Do not you may needto resynchronize the transmitter to the vehicle use metal flanges to“pop out” the battery. receiver. To do this, press theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons together and hold for at least seven secondsuntil theor horn 3. Put the new battery into the transmitter as shown sounds, when equipped with Content Theft-Deterrent. on the transmitter. Use a type CR2032 battery, Check the remote keyless entry transmitter. or equivalent. If attempts to resynchronize your transmitter to the 4. Reassemble the transmitter. Makesure the halves are vehicle are not successful, you may need to matchthe snapped together tightlyso water will not get in. transmitter to the vehicle. 2-11 Trunk Trunk Lock

A CAUTION: can also use the remote It can be dangerous to drivewith the trunkopen keyless entry transmitter, if because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle has this option. your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. If you must drivewith the trunkopen or if electrical wiringor other cable connections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk: Remote Trunk Release (If Equipped) 0 Make sureall windows are shut. Press the button behind the Turn the fan on yourheating or cooling glove box door to unlock system to itshighest speed with the setting the trunk from inside Your on VENT. That will force outsideair into vehicle. your transaxfe shift your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in lever mustbe in PARK (P). the Index. If you have air outlets onor under the instrument panel, open themall the way. See “Engine Exhaust” in theIndex.

2-12 Theft Parking Lots Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities. If you park ina lot where someonewill be watching Although your vehicle hasa number of theft-deterrent your vehicle, it’s best tolock it up and take yourkeys. features, we know that nothing we puton it can make But what if you have to leave your ignition key? it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you 0 If possible, park in a busy, welllit area. can help. 0 Put your valuables in a storage area, like yourtrunk Key in the Ignition or glove box. Be sureto close and lock the storage area. If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, anit’s easy target for joy riders or professional thieves-- so 0 Close all windows. don’t do it. 0 Lock the glove box. When you park your vehicle and openthe driver’s door, 0 Lock all doors exceptthe driver’s. you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. 0 Give the valet key to the valet. Then take the tnaster Your steering wheel will be locked, andso will your key with you. ignition and transaxle. And rememberto lock the doors. Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables outof sight. Put them in a storage area,or take them with you. Content Theft-Deterrent While armed, the doorswill not unlock with the power lock switch. Thealarm will go off if someone damages (If Equipped) the vehicle, tampers with the trunklock, enters the If your vehicle has’this option, it has a theft-deterrent vehicle (without using the remote keylessentry alarm system. transmitter or key to unlock thedoors), or turns the ignition on. Your horn will sound and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes. The system willalso cut off the fuel supply, preventing the vehicle from being driven. Arming with the PowerLock Switch Your alarm system will arm when you use either the power lock switch to lock the doors while any dooris open and the keyis removed from the ignition (ifyou would like toturn off the power door lock switch arming, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index). The security light flashes quickly to let you know when the system is ready to arm with the power door switches. The security light will stop flashingand stay on when you press the rear of the power lock switch, to let you A red light locatedon top of your instrument panel (near know the system is arming. After all doors are closed the center of the vehicle, nextto the windshield) will and locked, the securitylight will begin flashing ata very slow rate to let you know the systemis armed. flash slowly when the systemis armed.

2-14 Arming with the Remote Keyless Disarming with Your Key Entry Transmitter Your alarm system will disarm whenyou use your key Your alarm system will arm whenyou use your remote to unlock the doors.The security light willstop flashing keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors after the key to let you know the system is disarmed. If you would is removed from the ignition. The security light willturn like your keyto disarm the alarm system,see “Locks on to let you know the system is arming. After all doors and Lighting Choices” inthe Index. are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system Nuisance Alarms is armed. If you experience nuisance alarms (alarms which are not caused bythe opening of a door and are not Arming Confirmation desirable), you may needto reduce the damage If remote unlock confirmation is on (see “Locks and detection sensitivity. Try programming your Content Lighting Choices” in the Index), your headlamps will Theft-Deterrent to mode1 (see “Locks and Lighting flash briefly to let you know when your alarm system. Choices” inthe Index). If you continue to experience has armed. nuisance alarms, you may want totry turning off damage detectionby programming your Content Disarming with the Remote Keyless Theft-Deterrent to mode2 (see “Locks and Lighting Entry Transmitter Choices” in the Index). Your alarm system will disarm when you use your If you are still having trouble with nuisancealarms, you remote keyless entry transmitter to unlockthe doors. can turn off the Content Theft-Deterrent systemby The security light will stop flashing tolet you know the programming your Content Theft-Deterrent to mode3 system is disarmed. (see “Locks and Lighting Choices”in the Index). See your dealer or a qualified technicianfor service. New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in thelong run if you followthese guidelines: 0 Don’t drive at any one speed-- fast or slow -- for the first500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttlestarts. 0 Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km)or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’tyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. With the ignition keyin the ignition switch, you can turn Follow this breaking-in guideline every the switchto five positions. time you get new brake linings. ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things 0 Don’t tow a trailer duringbreak-in. like the radio and windshield wipers when the engineis See “Towing a Trailer” in the Indexfor off. To use ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it more information. toward you. Your steering wheelwill stay locked.

2-16 LOCK (B): Before you put the key into the ignition switch, the switch is in LOCK. It’salso the only position NOTICE: from which you can remove your key.This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a If your key seem stuck in LOCK and you can’t theft-deterrent feature. turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if OFF (C): This position lets youturn off the engine but so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the still turn the steering wheel.It doesn’t lock the steering steering wheel leftand right while you turn the wheel likeLOCK. Use OFF if you must have your key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. vehicle pushedor towed. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the RUN (D):This position is where the key returns ignition switch.If none of this works, then your after you start your vehicle. With the engineoff, you vehicle needs service. can use RUNto display some of your warning and indicator lights. Retained Accessory Power START (E): This position starts your engine. With retained accessory power, your power windows, A warning chime will soundif you open the driver’s audio system and sunroof will continue to work up to door when the ignition is OFF,in LOCK or 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned OFF to and ACCESSORY and the keyis in the ignition. none of the doors are opened. Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL(N). Your engine won’t start in any other position-- that’s a safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

2-17

~~ 2. If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops), NOTICE: it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the wayto the Don’t try to shiftto PARK (P) if your Pontiac is floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in moving. If you do, youcould damage the START for up to 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped. NOTICE: Starting Your 3100 Engine Your engine is designed to work with the 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts, let parts oraccessories, you could change theway go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your engine gets warm. the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. NOTICE: If you ever haveto have yourvehicle towed, see the partof this manual that tells how to do it Holding your key in START for longer than without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing 15 seconds at a time will cause your batteryto Your Vehicle” in the Index. be drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat can damageyour startermotor. .

2-18 Starting Your 3800 Series I1 Engine this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.After 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your waiting about 15 seconds, repeatthe normal ignition key toSTART. When theengine starts, let starting procedure. go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine getswarm. NOTICE: NOTICE: Your engine isdesigned to workwith the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical Holding yourkey in START for longer than parts or accessories, you could change theway 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And the excessiveheat the engine operates. Before adding electrical can damage yourstarter motor. equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t, your engine might notperform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your keyin the partof this manual that tells how todo it START for about three to five seconds at a time until without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing your engine starts.Wait about 15 seconds between Your Vehicle” in the Index. each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter. 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but

2-19 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 6 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is located below theair cleaner near the coolant reservoir bottle. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. I A CAUTION: - Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong In very cold weather,0 OF (- 18O C) or colder, the engine coolant heatercan help. You'll get easier startingand 110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon't reach, use a better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimumof at least 15 amps. four hours prior to starting your vehicle. 4. Before starting the engine,be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you don't, it could be damaged.

2-20 How long should you keepthe coolant heater plugged There are several different positionsfor your shift lever. in? The answer depends onthe outside temperature, the PARK (P): This locks your front wheels.It’s the best kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of position to use when youstart your engine because your trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact vehicle can’t move easily. your dealerin the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. Automatic Transaxle Operation It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle if the I‘% shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the 6 parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis 10 running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever PARKto (P). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a Trailer” in Your automatic transaxle may havea shift lever on the the Index. steering column or on the console between the seats. Maximum engine speed is limited when you’re in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline components from improper operation. 2-21 Make sure the shift leveris fully in PARK (P) before NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t starting the engine.Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re Shift Interlock. You must fully apply your regular brakes already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use before you can shift from PARK(P) when the ignition is NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicleis being towed. in RUN. If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushingit all the way into I PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. CAUTION: Release the shift lever buttonif you have a console shift. I A I Then move the shift lever outof PARK (P), being sure to press the shift lever buttonif you have a console shift. Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while See “Shifting Outof PARK (P)” in the Index. your engine is “racing” (running athigh speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up. brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit peopleor NOTICE: objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is racing. Shifting to REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle. Shift to REVERSE (R)only after yourvehicle is stopped. NOTICE:

Damage to your transaxle causedby shifting out To rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice orsand without damaging your transaxle, see of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine “Stuck: In Sand, Mud,Ice or Snow” in the Index. racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-22 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal normal driving. driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE If your vehicle has overdrive, AUTOMATIC (D). OVERDRIVE (D) is the overdrive position.If you need Here are some times you might choose THIRD(3) more power for passing, and you’re: instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(D): Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your When driving on hilly, winding roads. accelerator pedal about halfway down. When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the between gears. accelerator pedalall the way down. 0 When going down a steep hill. You’ll shift downto the next gearand have more power.

NOTICE:

If your vehicleseems to start up rather slowly, or if it seems not to shiftgears as you go faster, something may be wrong withtransaxle a system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged.So, if this happens, have your vehicle servicedright away. Until then, you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds.

2-23 SECOND (2): This position givesyou more power, but FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power, lower fuel economy.You can use SECOND (2) on hills. but lower fuel economy thanSECOND (2). You can use It can help control your speedas you go down steep it on very steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. If the shift mountain roads, but then you would also wantto use lever is put in FIRST (1)’ the transaxle won’t shift into your brakes off andon. first gear until the vehicleis going slowly enough.

. NOTICE: NOTICE: Don’t drive in SECOND(2) for more than If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to 25 miles (40 km) at speeds over 55 mph drive. This might happenif you were stuck in (88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. very deep sand or mud or wereup against a solid Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or object. You could damage yourtransaxle. THIRD (3) as muchas possible. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold Don’t shift intoSECOND (2) unless you are going your vehicle there with only the accelerator slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can pedal. This could overheat anddamage the damage yourengine. transaxle. Use your brakes or shift intoPARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

2-24 Shift Lock Release If your vehicle’s battery should go dead, there are two override access slots (forthe console shift) that will allow you to override park lock. 11The first is located underneath the steering column below the lock cylinder.

For vehicles with center console-mounted gear shift 1 levers, the second access slot is locatedon the upper, To use this slot: right-hand side of the console shift panel.To use 1. Remove the trim cap. this slot: 2. Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot and 1. Remove the cap with the words SHIFTLOCK press the lock cylinder. RELEASE on it. You will now be able to remove your key from the 2. Insert a screwdriver into the slot. Be careful notto ignition. Be sure to replace the trim cap after use.If your damage the cap. vehicle has a column-mounted gear shift lever, you will 3. Press down and hold. now be able to shift your vehicle outPARK of (P). You will now be able to shift your vehicle outof PARK (P). 2-25 Performance Shifting (IfEquipped) Parking Brake 1 Press the performance shift To set the parking brake, button, located on the side hold the regular brake pedal of the console shift knob, down with yourright foot. to allow the transaxle to Push down the parking shift at higher engine brake pedal withyour speeds, increasing left foot. acceleration performance.

If you have a vehicle with the3800 Supercharged To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake engine option, the“PERF SHIFT” light in the pedal down with your right foot and push the parking instrument panel cluster will come on. brake pedal with your leftfoot. When you lift your left Downshifts will occur at a lower percentage of foot, the parking brake pedal will followit to the accelerator use while you’rein the performance released position. shift mode. Press the button again to return to normal shifting. The transaxle will then shift at lower engine speeds, increasing fuel economy.

2-26 Shifting Into PARK (P) I NOTICE:

~ ~ ~ Driving withthe parking brakeon can cause CAUTION: your rear brakes to overheat.You may have to A replace them,and you could also damageother It can be dangerous to getout of your vehicle if parts of your vehicle. the shift lever is not fully PARK in (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.If If you are towing a trailer and parkingon any hill, see you have left the engine running, the vehiclecan “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That sectionshows move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. what to do first to keep the trailerfrom moving. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Column Shift 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and set the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever intoPARK (P) position like this:

0 Move the lever up as far as it will go. 1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 2. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is inPARK (P).

0 Pull the lever toward you.

2-28 Console Shift 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and 4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can set the parking brake. leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle isin PARK (P). 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this: Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running \ I 1 A CAUTION: r It can be dangerous toleave your vehicle with the engine running.Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat andeven catch fire.You or others could be injured.Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine runningunless you have to.

0 Hold in the button, located on the front of the shift knob. 0 Push the shift knob all the way toward the front of your vehicle.

2-29 If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, Shifting Out of PARK (P) be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmy set before you leave it. After you’ve moved Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock. You the shift lever into PARK (P) position, hold the regular must fully applyyour regular brakes beforeyou can brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift shift from PARK (P) when the ignitionis in RUN. See lever away fromPARK (P) without first pulling it toward “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in the Index. you (or, if you have a console shift lever, without first If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressure on pushing the button).If you can, it means that theshift the shift lever by pushingit all the way into PARK (P) lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P). while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the shift lever button if you have a console shift. Then move Torque Lock the shift lever out ofPARK (P), being sureto press the If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your shift lever button ifyou have a consoleshift. transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the If you ever hold the brake pedal down still but can’t vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawlin shift out ofPARK (P) with column shift, try this: the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To 1. Turn the key to OFF. prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end Stepof 4. into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). the Index. 4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gear you want. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can. of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. With the console shift lever,see “Shift Lock Release” If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another earlier in this section. vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,so you can pull the shift lever outof PARK (P).

2-30 Parking Over Things ' Engine Exhaust

.. . . .

---- e-" I Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas & -" carbon monoxide (CO),which you can't see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness anddeath. You might have exhaustcoming in if: 0 Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. 0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. 0 Your vehicle was damaged ina collision. Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points onthe road or over road debris. Repairs weren't done correctly. 0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into Things that can burncould touch hot exhaust your vehicle: parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park 0 Drive it only with all the windows down to over papers,leaves, dry grass or otherthings that blow out any CO; and can burn. 0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-31

~~ Running Your Engine While You’re Parked , A CAUTION: It’s better not to park with the engine running.But if you ever have to, hereare some things to know. It can be dangerous to get ofout your vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. CAUT’ IN: Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is A running unless you have to. If you’ve left the Idling the engine with the climate control engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. system off could allow dangerous exhaust into You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under vehicle won’t move, evenwhen you’re on fairly “Engine Exhaust”). level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift leverto PARK (P). Also, idling ina closed-in place canlet deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the fan switch atis the highest setting. One place Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle won’t this can happenis a garage. Exhaust-- with move. See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index. CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a If you are parking on a hilland if you’re pulling a garage with the engine running. trailer, also see“Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index. Another closed-in place can be ablizzard. I (See “Blizzard” in theIndex.)

2-32 Power Windows The driver’s window switch has an auto-down feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the rearof the switch, and the driver’s window will open a small amount.If the rear of the switch is pressedall the way down and released, the window willgo all the way down. To stop the window whileit is lowering, press the front of the switch. To raise the window, press and holdthe front of the switch. On four-door models, the driver’s window controlsalso include a lock-out switch. PressLOCK OUT to stop front and rear passengersfrom using their window switches. The driver canstill control all the windows with the lock on. PushLOCK OUT again for normal window operation. Whenthe orange bandon the switch is showing, the passengers can operate their windows.

Switches onthe driver’s door armrest control each of the Full Floating Horn windows when the ignition is on. In addition, each The full floating horn is designedso that you may press passenger door has a switchfor its own window. anywhere on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn.

2-33 Tilt Steering Wheel &rn SignaVMultifunction Lever A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive.You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. -- To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the --I lever. Move the steering wheel toa comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheelin place. The lever on the leftside of the steering column includes your:

0 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator 0 Headlamp HighLow Beam WindshieldWipers WindshieldWasher Cruise Control (If Equipped)

2-34 firn Signal and Lane Change Indicator If a bulb is burned out, replaceit to help avoidan accident. If the arrows don’tgo on at all whenyou The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check downward (forleft) positions. These positions allowyou the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). to signal a turnor a lane change. A chime will soundif you leave your turnsignal on for To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km). down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer An arrow on the instrument To change your headlamps panel willflash in the from lowbeam to high direction of the turn or beam, or high to low, pull I lane change. the multifunction leverall 7 A the way toward you. Then release it.

To signal a lane change,just raise or lower the lever When the high beams areon, a light on the instrument until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you panel also will be on. complete yourlane change. The lever will return by itself when you releaseit. Flash-to-Pass Feature As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow When your headlamps areoff, pull the lever toward you flashes faster than normal,a signal bulb may be burned to momentarily switch onthe high beams (to signalthat out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. you are goingto pass). When you release the lever, they will turn off.

2-35 Windshield Wipers For steady wiping at low speed,turn the band toLOW. For high-speed wiping,turn the band further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers,turn the band to OFF. You can set the wiper speedfor a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.The closer to LOW, the shorter the delay. Be sure to clear ice and snowfrom the wiper blades before using them.If they’re frozento the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.If your blades do become damaged, get new bladesor blade inserts. Heavy snow orice can overload your wipers.A circuit breaker will stop them untilthe motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

You control the windshield wipers turningby the band marked WIPER. For a single wiping cycle,turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.

2-36 Windshield Washer Cruise Control (If Equipped) At the top ofthe multifunction lever, there’s a paddle with the wordPUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The wipers willrun for several sweeps and theneither stop or return to your preset speed. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.

I A CAUTION: In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. r With cruise control, youcan maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Thiscan really help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off. Setting Cruise Control A CAUTdN: - CAUTION: 0 Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou /A can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding If you leave your cruise control switch on when roads or in heavy traff“lc. you’re not using cruise, youmight hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to.You 0 Cruise control canbe dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes could bestartled andeven lose control. Keepthe in tire traction can cause needless wheel cruise controlswitch off until you want to use it. spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise controlon slippery roads. 1. Move the cruise control switchto ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. If your vehicle isin cruise control when the optional 3. Push in theSET button at theend of the lever and traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the release it. cruise control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction Control System” in the Index.)When road 4. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal. conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

2-38 Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Suppose you set your cruise control a at desired speed There are two waysto reduce your speed whileusing and then you applythe brake. This, of course, shutsoff cruise control: the cruise control. But you don’t need to it.reset 0 Push in the SET button until you reach the lower Once you’re going about25 mph (40 km/h) or more, speed you want, then release it. you can movethe cruise control switchfrom ON to R/A To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET (Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second. You’ll go button for less than half a second. Each time you do right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control There are two ways togo to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedalto increase your speed. When Use the accelerator pedal to get tothe higher speed. you take yourfoot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow Push in theSET button, then release the button and down to thecruise control speed youset earlier. the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it How well your cruise control will work hills on depends there until you get up the to speed you want, and upon your speed, load andthe steepness of the hills. then release the switch. To increase your speed in When going up steep hills, you may have to onstep the very small amounts, move the switch to R/Afor less accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going than half a second and then releaseit. Each time you downhill, you may haveto brake or shift to a lower gear do this, your vehicle will go1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. to keep your speed down. Of course, applyingthe brake takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers findthis to The accelerate feature will only work after you setthe be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on cruise control speedby pushing the SET button. steep hills.

2-39 Ending Cruise Control There are two waysto turn off the cruise control: Step lightly on the brake pedal;OR 0 Move the cruise switch to OW. Erasing Cruise Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise controlor the ignition, or shift into PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), your cruise control set speed memoryis erased. Exterior Lamps The lamp controls are located on the lower,left side of the instrument panel, to theleft of the steering wheel. - They control these systems: =c) : Turn the knob to this symbol to turn onthe Headlamps headlamps and other operating lamps. Taillamps pf : Turn the knob to this symbol to turn on the parking and other operating lamps without ParkingLamps the headlamps. LicenseLamps Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the lamps. Sidemarker Lamps 0 Instrument Panel Lights 0 CourtesyLamps 0 FogLamps Daytime Running Lamps To idle your vehicle withthe DRL off, set the parking brake while the ignitionis in OFF or LOCK. Thenstart Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) can make it easierfor your vehicle.The DRL will stayoff until you release the others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. parking brake. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpfulin the As with any vehicle, you should turnon the regular short periods after dawn and before sunset. headlamp system when you need it. A light sensor on topof the instrument panel makes the Fog Lamps DRL work, so be sureit isn’t covered. The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when: 0 The ignition is on, The headlamp switch is off and 0 The parking brake is released. When the DRL are on, only your low-beam headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. When it’s dark enough outside, your headlamps will change to full brightness.The other lamps that comeon with your headlamps will also come on. When it’s bright enough outside,the regular lampswill The fog lamps switchis located in the upper, left comer go out, and your low-beam headlamps change theto of the instrument panel, tothe left of the instrument reduced brightnessof DRL. panel cluster. To turn the fog lamps on, press the right side of the fog Courtesylamps Lamps switch. A light will glow on the switch to let you know that When any door is opened, several lamps comeon. These they are on. (Your parking lamps mustbe on, or your fog lamps won’t comeon.) Press the left sideof the switch turnto lamps are courtesy lamps. They makeit easy for you to the fog lampsoff. enter and leave your vehicleat night. You can also turn these lamps on by turning theinterior lamps dial all the The fog lamps willgo off whenever you change to way to the right. high-beam headlamps. When you returnto low beams, the fog lamps will come on again. Illuminated Entry Interior Lamps The Illuminated Entry featurewill illuminate the interiorso Instrument Panel Intensity Control that you can see the inside ofyour vehicle beforeyou enter at night. The interior lamps will come on40 for seconds when You can brighten or dim you unlock your doors using the remote keyless entry the instrument panel lights transmitter (ifequipped) and the ignition in is LOCK or OFF. by turning the interior After 40 seconds have elapsed, the interior lampswill slowly lamps dial. fade out. The lampswill fade out before40 seconds have elapsed if you: 0 Lock all doors using your remote keyless entry transmitter.

0 Lock the doors using the power doorlock switch. When any door is opened, illuminatedentry is canceled. The interior lamps will stay on while doorany is opened and slowly fade out when all doorsare closed. The Turn the dial to the right to increase the brightness of the interior lampsmay stay on for up to 25 seconds after all instrument panellights, to the left to decrease the doors have been closed if they have not been locked. brightness. Turn the controlall the way to theleft to turn See “Delayed Illumination” laterin this section. them off. Delayed Illumination 0 Lock all doors using your remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped). The Delayed Illumination feature will continue to illuminate the interior for25 seconds after all the doors 0 Lock the doors usingthe power door lock switch. have been closedso that you can findthe ignition and When any door is opened, exit lightingis canceled. The buckle your seat belt at night. Delayed Illumination willinterior lamps will stay on while any dooris opened and not occur while the ignitionis in RUN or ACCESSORY. will slowly fade out when all the doors are closed.The After 25 seconds have elapsed, the interior lamps will interior lamps may stay onfor up to 25 seconds after all slowly fade out.The lamps will fade out before the the doors have been closedif they have not been locked. 25 seconds have elapsedif you: See “Delayed Illumination” earlierin this section. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. To turn the Exit Lightingfeature off or on, see “Locks Lock all doors using your remote keyless entry and Lighting Choices” inthe Index. transmitter (if equipped). Battery Saver Lock the doors using the power door lock switch. Your vehicle has a featureto help preventyou from To turn Delayed Illumination featureoff or on, see draining the battery in case you accidentally leave the “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. interior, trunk or underhood lamps on. If you leave any of these lamps on whilethe ignition is in LOCK orOFF, Exit Lighting they will automatically turnoff after 10 minutes. The For exiting your vehicle at night, your vehicleis lamps won’t come backon again until youdo one of equipped with the Exit Lighting feature. The interior the following: lamps will illuminate for up to25 seconds when you Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. remove your key from the ignition. After25 seconds have elapsed,the interior lamps will slowly fade out. 0 Turn the interior lamp dial all the way to the right, The lamps will fade out before the25 seconds have then back slightly tothe left. elapsed if you: Open (or close and reopen) a door thatis closed. 0 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. 2-43 Note that if your vehicle hasless than 15 miles (25 km) Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps on the odometer, the battery saverwill turn off the lamps (If Equipped) after only three minutes. There is a reading lamp provided in eachrear assist Front Reading Lamps handle. Use the button nextto each lamp to turn themon and off. Roof Console Reading Lamps These lamps are partof the roof console. They willgo on when you open thedoors. When the doors are closed, push the button nextto each lamp toturn them on and off. The console also containsan open storage bia

If your vehiclehas the optionalsunroof, you will have reading lamps in front of your sunroof switch. Press the button behind each reading lampto turn them on and off.

2-44 Locks and Lighting Choices Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features.The features you can program depend on the options that came with your vehicle.The following chart shows the features thatcan be programmed and which options you need to have to program them.

~ I Feature Door Remote Remote Content Content Driver’s Lock/ Theft Theft Locking/ Door Unlock Arming/ Lockout Unlock Confirma - Disarming Deterrent Control tion

I 2 I X I x I X I 3 X X X X 4 X X X X X X X

2-45 Entering Prograwng Mode 2. Turn the ignitionkey to LOCK or OFF. To program features,your vehicle must be inthis 3. Remove theMALL PGM fuse from the instrument programming mode. Follow these steps: panel fuse block. 4. Turn the ignition switchto ACCESSORY. 5. You will hear one to four chimes, depending on vehicle content. You can now program your choices. Leaving Programming Mode To get out of programming mode, just turn the key from ACCESSORY to OFF and put theMALL PGM fuse back into the instrument panelfuse block.

1. The Content Theft-Deterrent system (if equipped) must be disarmed.

2-46 Delayed IlluminatiodExit Lighting Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle comes with this feature set in mode4. To Your vehicle comeswith this feature set in mode 3. To change the factory setting while in the programming change the factory setting, while the in programming mode do the following: mode do the following: 1. Turn the interior lamps dial all theway to the right 1. Press LOCK on the power lock switch. and then back slightlyto the left. 2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number 2. Count the numberof chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set of chimes tells you which mode your vehicleset is for. You change the mode by pressingLOCK again. for. You change the modeby turning the interior 3. Repeat Step 2 until you hearthe number of chimes lamps dial all the way to the right and then back that matches the mode you want. slightly tothe left. Mode 1: Off (Automatic door locking and unlocking are 3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes disabled.) You will always need to lock your door that matches the mode you want. manually while driving to increase occupant safety. Mode 1: Both Off (The interior lamps will turn oron off 0 To lock: All doors will lock when you press the at the same instant that a door is opened or closed.) power door lock switch or when you lock the vehicle Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only (The interior lamps using the remote keyless entry transmitter. will stay on for about 25 seconds afterall the doorsare To unlock: All doors will unlock when you press the closed, or until you lockthe doors.) power door lock switch again or when you press Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps will UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter. come on whenever you remove thekey from the ignition and stay on for about 25 seconds, or until you lock the doors.) Mode 4: Both On (This combines modes 2 and3.)

2-47 Mode 2: Automatic Locking Only Lockout Deterrennast Door 0 Automatic Door Unlocking: Off Closed Locking Automatic Door Locking: Shift outof PARK (P) Your vehicle comes withthis feature set in mode2. To with the ignition on and the driver’s door closed, all change the factory setting,do the following: doors will lock automatically. 1. Press UNLOCK on the power lock switch. Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking with IgnitionOff 2. Count the numberof chimes you hear.The number Automatic Door Unlocking: ?’urn off the ignition of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set with the transaxle inPARK (P) and all doors will for. You change the mode by pressing unlock automatically. UNLOCK again. Automatic Door Locking: Shift out of PARK (P) 3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the numberof chimes with the ignitionon and the driver’s door closed and, that matches the mode you want. all doors willlock automatically. Mode 1: Both Off (Doors will always lock immediately Mode 4: Automatic Unlocking and Locking with when you press LOCKon the power lock switchor the Transaxle in PARK (P) remote keyless entry transmitter,if equipped.) Automatic Door Unlocking: Shift into PARK (P) Mode 2: Lockout Deterrent Only (If you leave your key with the ignitionon and all doors will in the ignition with the driver’sdoor open, you will not unlock automatically. be able to lock the doors using your power locks.) Automatic Door Locking:Shift out of PARK (P) Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power with the ignition on and the driver’s door closedand lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter(if all doors will lock automatically. equipped) is used to lock the vehicle whileany door is open and the key is outof the ignition, youwill hear three chimes. The doorswill not lock. Five seconds afterthe last door is closed, all doors will lock.) Mode 4: Both On (This combines modes2 and 3.) 2-48 RemoteDrivc Unlock Control Remote LocWUnlock Confirmation Your vehicle comes withthis feature set in mode2. To Your vehicle comes withthis feature set in mode 4. TO change the factory setting while in the programming change the factory setting while in the programming mode, do the following: mode do the following: 1. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless 1. Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. entry transmitter. 2. Count the numberof chimes you hear. The number 2. Count the numberof chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set of chimes tells you which mode your vehicleis set for. You change the modeby pressing for. You change the modeby pressing LOCKon UNLOCK again. your remote keyless entry transmitter again. 3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the numberof chimes 3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the numberof chimes that matches the mode you want. that matches the mode you want. Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press This feature provides feedbackto the driver when the UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter,all vehicle receives alockhnlock command from the doors will unlock.) remote keyless entry transmitter.The fsllowing modes may be selected: Mode 2: Remote Driver’s Door and All Doors Unlock (When you press UNLOCK onyour remote keyless Mode 1: Off (Remote lock and unlock confirmation entry transmitter once, the driver’s door will unlock.If are disabled.) you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, alldoors Mode 2: Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior will unlock.) Lamps Only Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock your vehicle, your headlamps will flash briefly to let youknow your command is received. e Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the or open your trunk, your headlamps will flash briefly remote keyless entrytransmitter to unlock your vehicle to let you know your command is received. or open your trunk, your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know when your command is received. Content Theft-Deterrent Mode 3: Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior Your vehicle comes with thisfeature set in mode4. To Lamps and Horn change the factory setting while in the programming mode, do the following: Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock your vehicle, the horn 1. Turn the parking lamps on, then off. will sound briefly and your headlampswill flash 2. Count the number of chimes you hear.The number briefly to let youknow your command is received. of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set Remote Unlock Confmnation: When you use the for. You change the modeby turning the parking remote keyless entrytransmitter to unlock your vehicle lamps on, thenoff again. or open yourtrunk, your headlamps will flash briefly 3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes to let you know your command is received. that matches the mode you want. Mode 4: Remote Lock Confirmationwith Exterior Mode 1: Damage Detection with Reduced Sensitivity Lights andHorn (on secondLOCK press) (If anyone seriously damages your vehicle, tampers with Remote Lock Confirmation: When you usethe the trunk lock or opens a door while your Content remote keyless entry transmitter tolock your vehicle, Theft-Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound your headlamps will flash briefly to let youknow and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes). your command is received. Thehorn will sound Mode 2: Damage Detection Off (If anyone tampers with briefly and the headlamps will flash brieflyif you your trunk lock or opens adoor while your Content press the LOCK button again withinfive seconds. Theft-Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound e Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes.) remote keyless entrytransmitter to unlock your vehicle Mode 3: All Off (Your Content Theft-Deterrent system is always disarmed.) 2-50 Mode 4: Damage Detection withNormal Sensitivity (If 4. Repeat Step 3 until you hear the numberof chimes anyone damages your vehicle, tampers with yourtrunk that matches the modeyou want. lock or enters your vehicle while your Content 5. Remove your key from the door key cylinder. Theft-Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and your headlamps willflash for up to two minutes.) Mode 1: Power Lock Switch ArmingOff Content Theft-Deterrent Arming 0 Your Content Theft-Deterrent system willarm when and Disarming you lockthe doors with your remote keyless entry transmitter. The key must be removed from the Your vehicle comes withthis feature in mode 3. To ignition when you lockthe doors or the Content change the factory setting, whilein the programming Theft-Deterrent system will notarm. mode do the following: 0 Your Content Theft-Deterrent system willdisarm 1. Insert your second key fully into any door key when you unlock the doors with the keys or your cylinder and turn it to the unlock position. This step remote keyless entry transmitter. is necessary to prevent accidental programmingof this feature to mode 2. Do not program this feature to Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter mode 2 without first reading the special note Arm/Disarm Only contained in the description abovefor that mode. 0 Your Content Theft-Deterrent system willarm when The door key lock cylinder must remain in the you lock the doors with your remote keyless entry unlock position duringSteps 2 through 4. transmitter. The key must be removed from the 2. Press the horn symbolon your remote keyless ignition when you lockthe doors or the content entry transmitter. theft-deterrent system will notarm. 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number 0 Your Content Theft-Deterrent system willdisarm of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle set is when you unlock thedoors with your remote keyless for. You change the mode by pressing the horn entry transmitter. symbol on your remote keyless entry transmitter again. 2-51 Special Note: While this mode provides increased Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror security, it canbe a problem if your remote keyless entry transmitter is damaged, lost or if it fails to operate for To reduce glare fromlamps behind you, push the lever any reason while the Content Theft-Deterrent systemis away from you (to the night position). To return the mirror armed. The Content Theft-Deterrent system must be back to theday position, pull the lever toward you. disarmed for the engine to run and while in mode2, Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror your key canno longer disarm the system. (If Equipped) Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming 0 Your Content Theft-Deterrent system willarm when you lock the doors using either power door lock switch while any dooris open and the key is removed from the ignition. 0 Your Content Theft-Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with your remote keylessentry transmitter. The key must be removedfrom the ignition when you lockthe doors or the Content Theft-Deterrent system will notarm. 0 Your Content Theft-Deterrent system will disarm when you unlockthe doors with your key or your remote keyless entry transmitter. Your vehicle may have an electrochromic dayhight Mirrors rearview mirror. Push the button onthe bottom of the Adjust all the mirrorsso you can see clearly when you mirror to turn this feature on.The mirror will darken are sitting in a comfortable driving position. gradually to reduce glare from headlamps behind you. This may take afew moments.

2-52 One photocellon the front of the mirror senses whenit Convex OutsideMirror is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing Your passenger’s side mirroris convex. A convex rearward, senses headlamps behind you.To turn the electrochromic feature off, press the button on the mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. bottom of the mirror again. To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner. A CAUTION: Power Outside Mirrors - A convex mirror can make things (like other The electric mirror control vehicles) look farther away than they really are. is near the driver’s window, If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you on the armrest. Turn the could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your control to the left to adjust inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before the left mirror or to the right changing lanes. to adjust the right mirror. Then move the controlin the direction you want to

2-53 Storage Compartments Glove Box Use the master key to lock and unlock the glove box. To open, lift the right sideof the latch. Center Console Storage

The center console alsocontains two cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the cupholderdoor, located just behind the console shift lever. The two cupholders will pop up into an upright position. Just below the center ashtrayis an open storage compartment. In front of this, you may havea smaller compartment for storing smaller items. To open the armrest storage area, pull up on the front edge of the latch.The console has cassetteand CD storage anda coinholder.

2-54 Overhead Console READING LAMPS: To turn either reading lampon or off, press the switch nextto it. GARAGE DOOR OPENER: You can store your garage door opener in therear compartment of your overhead console, and operateit from this position. To install your garage door opener, follow these instructions: 1. Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward. Remove the piece of self-sticking Velcro? 2. Peel the protective backing fromthe Velcro and pressit firmly to the back of your garage k door opener. 3. Be sure that the buttonon your garage door opener is centered above the area with raised lines on the compartment door. Make surethe button is facing down and press the opener firmlyinto place.

2-55 SUNGLASSES STORAGE COMPARTMENT: Your sunglasses storage compartmentis the second compartment fkom the back on the overheadconsole. To open the sunglasses storage compartment, press the release latch forward and pull the compartment down to the fullopen position. ACCESSORY POWER OUTLET: This is located in front of your reading lamps in a small, black door. Push up on the bottom edge of this door to expose your accessory power outlet anda small storage compartment.

4. Once the openeris installed, remove the peg(B) from the compartment. Install the peg onto the feature (A) on the door that is aligned with your garage door opener button. 5. Add one peg at a time untilyour garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button.

2-56 Trunk Access Panel(If Equipped) Convenience Net(If Equipped) Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it on the back wallof the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops. The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store themin the trunk as far forward as you can. You can unhook the netso that it willlie flat when you’re not using it. Ashtrays and Lighter The centerfront ashtray is an the instrument panel.To open it, pull at the bottom of the ashtray untilit is fully open. To remove the ashtray cup,lift the tabs on the If your vehicle has rear seat armrests, you willalso have sides and pullout. a trunk access panel. To use the trunk access panel, pull your rear armrest down, unlock the access panel and pullYour vehicle has one rear ashtray. There is eitherone on it down. the front seat armrest backor one on the back of the center console (ifyou have that option).To open the Rear Armrest Storage(If Equipped) ashtray, press the right side and turnit open. If you have a trunk access panel, you willalso have a pull down armrest that containsan open storage bin and two cupholders.

2-57 To remove the ashtrayfor cleaning, press the snufferas Sun Visors you lift up the bottom of the ashtray. To block out glare, youcan swing downthe visors. You can also swing them fromfront to side. NOTICE: Visor Vanity Mirrors Don’t put papers and otherthings that burn into Open the cover to expose the vanitymirror. If your your ashtrays.If you do, cigarettes or other vehicle has the optional lighted vanitymirrors, the smoking materials could set them on fire, lamps come on whenyou open the cover. causing damage. Accessory Power Outlet If your vehicle has a centerconsole, you have a 12-volt To use the lighter, located inside the centerfront ashtray, outlet. It is on the passenger’s side, nearthe floor. just push it in all the way and letgo. When it’s ready,it Remove the tethered capto use the outlet. will pop back by itself. NOTICE: NOTICE:

~~ ~~ Adding some electrical equipmentyour to vehicle Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with yourhand can damage it or keep other things from working while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your back away fromthe heating element whenit’s warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding ready. That canmake it overheat, damaging the electrical equipmentand never use anything lighter and the heating element. requiring more than 20 amps.

2-58 Purse or LitterBag Holder Your sunroof includes a sliding glass panel anda two-piece sunshade. The switch worksonly when the On the frontof the center console, to the rightof the ignition or RAP is on. See “Retained Accessory Power” accessory power outlet(on the passenger’s sideof the in the Index. vehicle), thereis a hook that can be used to holda purse or litter bag. Push the rearof the switch once and the sunroof will open to the vent position only.You will need to open the Sunroof (If Equipped) sunshade by hand. Push the rear of the switcha second time and the sunroof will open the remainderof the way by itself. This is the express-open feature. To close the sunroof, push and hold the frontof the switch until the sunroof closes. The sunshade can only 1 be closed by hand.

2-59 The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System

K C

2-60 The main componentsof your instrument panel are: A. Side Window Defogger Vents G. Comfort Controls B. Fog Lamp Switch H. Audio System C. Instrument Panel Vents I. Ashtray D. Interior Lamp Control J. Glove Box E. Exterior Lamp Control IS. Trip Computer/Driver Information Center E Instrument Panel Cluster

2-61 Instrument Panel Cluster

/APPLY BRAKE TO Y((FT FROM PARK

United States VersionShown, Others Similar Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’llknow how fast you’re going, about how much fuelis in your tank and many other things you needto drive safely and economically.

2-62 SpeedometedOdometer Tachometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your I odometer shows howfar your vehicle has been driven in either miles (usedin the United States)or in kilometers (used in Canada). Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.If you see silver lines between the numbers, you’llknow someone has probably tampered withit and the numbers may not be correct. You may wonder what happensif your vehicle needs a new odometer installed.If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then thatwill be done. If it can’t, then it will be set at zero and a labelmust be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute(rpm). Trip Odometer Your trip odometer tells howfar you have driven since you last reset it.To set it to zero, press the RESET NOTICE: button onthe right sideof the instrument cluster. Do not operate the engine with the tachometerin the red area, or engine damage may occur.

2-63 Warning Lights, Gages When oneof the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving,or when one of the gages shows and Indicators there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you This part describes the warning lights and gages that what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you Waiting todo repairs can be costly-- and even locate them. dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong beforeit becomes serious enoughto cause an Your vehicle may also have a driver information system expensive repairor replacement. Paying attention to that works along with the warning lights and gages.See your warning lights and gages could also save youor “Driver Information System” inthe Index. others from injury. Safety Belt Reminder Light Warning lights come on when there may be ora is problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you When the key is turned to RUN or START,a chime will will see in the details on the next few pages, some come onfor about eight secondsto remind people to warning lights come on briefly when youstart the fasten their safety belts, unlessthe driver’s safety beltis engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are already buckled. familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. The safety belt light will also comeon and stay on Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem for about20 seconds, then with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and it will flashfor about warning lights work together to letyou know when 14 55 seconds. If the driver’s there’s a problem with your vehicle. belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

2-64 Air Bag Readiness Light Charging System Light There is an air bag readiness light onthe instrument The charging system light panel, which showsSRS AIR BAG. The system checks will come on briefly when the air bag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The you turn on the ignition, as light tells you if there isan electrical problem.The a check to show youit’s system check includes theair bag sensors, theair bag Ifl working. Then it will go modules, the wiring andthe crash sensing and out. diagnostic module. For more informationon the air bag system, see“Air Bag” in the Index. If it stays on, or comes on while youare driving, you This light will come on may have a problem withthe charging system.It could when you start your engine, indicate that you haveloose a drive belt or another and it will flashfor a few electrical problem. Haveit checked right away. Driving seconds. Then the light SRS AI R BAG while this light is on could drain your battery. should go out. This means the system is ready. If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turnoff all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. If the air bag readinesslight stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem. Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake systemis divided into I CAUTION: two parts.If one part isn’t working, the otherpart can A still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you Your brake system may not be working properly need both parts working well. if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving If the warninglight comes on, there is a brake problem. with the brake system warning lighton can lead Have your brake system inspected right away. to an accident.If the lightis still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have This light should come on the vehicle towed for service. when you turn the key to STmT. If it doesn’t come I I on then, haveit fixed so it When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will be ready to warn you if will also come on when you set your parking brake. The there’s a problem. light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it meansyou have a brake problem. If the light comes on whileyou are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedalis harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is on, still have the vehicle towed for service. (See “TowingYour Vehicle’’ in the Index.)

2-66 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Traction Control System Warning Light (3800 Supercharged Engine Only) With the anti-lock brake system, this light will The traction control system come on when you start warning light may comeon your engine andit will for the followingreasons: stay onfor three seconds. TCS That’s normal. 1OFF

If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn 0 If you turn the systemoff by pressing theTCS button the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stayson located on the far right hand side of the Driver when you’re driving, stopas soon as possible and turn Information Center, the warning lightwill come on and the ignition off. Then start the engine again to resetthe stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again again. The warning light should gooff. (See “Traction while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service.the If Control System” in the Index for more information.) light is on and the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, youstill have brakes, butyou don’t have 0 If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically anti-lock brakes. Adjust your driving accordingly. related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will comeon. If The anti-lock brake system warninglight should come your brakes begin to overheat,the traction control on briefly when you turnthe ignition key toRUN. If the system will turnoff and the warning light will come light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be on until your brakescool down. ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays onfor an extended periodof time whenthe system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

2-67 Enhanced Traction System Warning Light When this warning light ison, the system will notlimit (3100 or 3800 Engine) wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. Low Traction Light When your anti-lock system TRAC is adjusting brake pressure OFF LOW to help avoid a braking skid, this light willcome on. See TRAC “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” earlierin The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come this section. on forthe following reasons: 0 If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC If you have the Enhanced Traction System theor button on thefar right hand sideof the Driver Traction Control System, thislight will also come on Information Center, the warning light will come on when the systemis limiting wheel spin.You may feel or and stay on. Toturn the system back on, press the hear the system working, butthis is normal. Slippery button again. The warninglight should go off. (See road conditions may exist theif low tractionlight comes “Enhanced Traction System”in the Indexfor more on, so adjust your driving accordingly.The light will information.) stay onfor a few seconds after the traction system stops limiting wheel spin.See “Enhanced Traction System”or If the Enhanced Traction System warninglight “Traction Control System”in the Index. comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. Adjust your driving accordingly. If the traction control systemis affected by an engine-related problem, the system will turnoff and the warning light will come on. 2-68 The low traction light also comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light doesn’t come NOTICE: on then, haveit fixed so it will be there to tell you when the anti-lock brake system, Traction Control System or If you keep driving your vehicle with this light Enhanced Traction System is active. on, after a while, your emission controls may not Malfunction Indicator Lamp work as well, your fuel economy may notas be (Service Engine Soon Light) good and your engine may not runas smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may be not Your vehicle is equipped covered by your warranty. with a computer which SERVICE monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission This light should come on, as a checkto show you it is ENGINE SOON control systems. working, when the ignition is on andthe engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, haveit repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunctionin one of two ways: This system is called OBDI1 (On-Board 0 Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and assure that emissions are at acceptable levelsfor the may damage the emission control system youron life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light and service may be required. comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicatedby the a Light On Steady-- An emission control system system before any problem is apparent. This may malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This Dealer or qualified service centerdiagnosis and system is also designed to assist your service technician service may be required. in correctly diagnosingany malfunction. 2-69 If the LightIs Flashing If the LightIs On Steady The following may prevent more serious damage to You may be able to correct the emission system your vehicle: malfunction by considering the following: Reducing vehicle speed. Did you recently putfuel into your vehicle?

0 Avoiding hard accelerations. If so, reinstall thefuel cap, making sure to fully install Avoiding steep uphill grades. the cap. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap has been leftoff or improperly installed.A loose or 0 If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof missing fuel cap will allow fuelto evaporate into the cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If installed should turn the lightoff. the Light Is On Steady” following. Did you just drive througha deep puddle of water? If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to doso, If so, your electrical system may be wet.The condition stop the vehicle. Find a safe placeto park your vehicle. will usually be corrected when the electrical system Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the dries out. A few driving trips should turn the lightoff. engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.If the light isstill flashing, Are you low on fuel? follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your As your engine starts to run outof fuel, your engine may dealer or qualified service center for service. not run as efficiently as designed since small amountsof air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detectthis. Adding fuel should correctthis condition. Make sure toinstall the fuel capproperly. It will take a few driving trips toturn the light off. Have you recently changed brandsof fuel?

2-70 If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see Oil Warning Light “Fuel” in the Index). Poorfuel quality will cause your engine not torun as efficiently as designed.You may If you have a problemwith notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you your oil pressure, this light put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on may stay on after you start acceleration or stumblingon acceleration. (These your engine,or come on conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) when you are driving. This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. If you experience one or moreof these conditions, This indicates that oil is not going through your engine change the fuel brand you use. It will requireleast at one quickly enough to keepit lubricated. The engine could full tankof the proper fuelto turn the lightoff. be low on oilor could have some other oil problem. If none of theabove steps have madethe light turn off, Have it fixed right away. have your dealer or qualified service center checkthe The oil light could also come on two other situations: vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and in diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical 0 When the ignitionis on but the engineis not running, problems that may have developed. the light will come onas a test to showyou it is working, but the lightwill go out when youturn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on withthe ignition on, you may have a problem with thefuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away. 0 If you make a hard stop, the light may come on afor moment. This is normal.

2-71 A CAUTION: This light comes on when you press the performance Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If PERF shift button (located on the you do, your enginecan become so hot that it console shift) to indicate catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. SHIFT that your vehicleis in Check your oil as soon as possible and have your performance shifting mode. vehicle serviced. See “Performance Shifting” inthe Index. Low Oil Level Light NOTICE: I Your engine is equipped with an oil level monitoring Damage to your engine from neglected oil LOW OIL system. When the ignition problems can be costly and is not covered by key is turned to ON, the your warranty. LEVEL LOW OIL LEVEL light will briefly flash.

If the light does not flash, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If the lightstays on, stop the vehicle ona level surface and turn the engineoff. Check the oil level using the engine oil dipstick. (See “EngineOil” in the Index.)

2-72 The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level Engine Coolant Temperature Gage during the brief period between key on and engine crank. It does not monitor engine oil level when the You have a gage that shows engine is running. Additionally, anoil level check is the engine coolant only performed if the engine has been turnedoff for a temperature. If the gage considerable period of time, allowing the oil normally in pointer movesinto the red circulation to drain backinto the oil pan. area, your engine is too hot! Engine Coolant Temperature Light This light tells you that your engine coolant has overheated or your radiator cooling fanis not working. TEMP That reading means the sarne thing the as warning light. It meansthat your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pulloff the road, stop your If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible. driving conditions,you should pull off the road, stop In “Problems on the Road,”this manual shows what to your vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible. do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-73 Low Coolant Warning Light I NOTICE: If this light comeson, your system is lowon Remember, driving without washer fluid can be coolant and the engine LOW dangerous. A bad mud splash can block your may overheat. COOLANT vision. You could collide with another vehicle. Check your washer fluid often, and add only the proper fluid. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can. Trunk Ajar Warning Light Low Washer Fluid Warning Light This light will come on This light will comeon if your trunk is not when your ignition is on completely closed. and the fluid container I is low. AJAR LOW

2-74 Fuel Gage The gage moves a little when you turn a comer or speed up.The gage needle should move no more Your fuel gage tellsyou than 1/8 of a tank under any driving maneuver. about how much fuel you have left when the ignition Low Fuel Light is on. When the indicator If your fuel is low, a light nears EMPTY (E), you still will come on and stay on have a little fuel left, but until you add fuel. you should get more soon. LOW FUEL

Here are some things owners ask about. All these It will also come on for a few seconds whenyou first situations are normal and do not show a problem with turn on the ignition as a check to show you it’s working. your fuel gage: If it doesn’t comeon then, see your dealer. At the service station,the pump shuts off before the gage reads FULL (F). 0 It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank‘s capacity to fill it.

2-75 Driver Information Center (If Equipped)

Your Driver Information Center givesyou important safety and maintenance facts. When you turn the ignitionon, all of the driver information center lightsup for a few seconds. Then it goesto work.

2-76 Functions DOOR AJAR: If one of your doorsis left ajar, a light will appear next to that door on thevehcle outline. CHANGE OIL SOON: This light will appear when the system predicts that the oil’s remaining useful life is TRAC SWITCH:If your vehicle has the Trac System, almost up. The system predicts remaining oil life using you will havea disable switch on the far right side of inputs from length of drives, coolant temperature, your Driver Information Center. Your Trac System is engine rpm and vehicle speed. It alerts you to change automatically activated when you turn the ignition on. the oil on a schedule consistent with your vehicle’s This switch will activate/deactivate the Trac System.If driving conditions. you need to disable the system, suchas when you are stuck and are rocking your vehicle back and forth, push After changing the oil, the system must be reset. With this switch. See “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the ignition key in the ON position but the engineoff, the Index. fully push and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds. If the CHANGEOIL SOON TRAC OFF: This light lets you know that your Trac light flashes, the system is resetting. Turn the ignition System has been disabled and will not limit wheel spin. key to the OFF position, then start the vehicle.If the See “Enhanced Traction System Warning Light”or CHANGE OIL SOON light comes back on, the oil life “Low Traction Light” inthe Index. monitor has not reset. Repeat the procedure. LOW TRAC: This light will come on when your Trac LOW WASHER FLUID: This light will come on when System is limiting wheel spin.See “Trac System” or your ignition is on and the fluid containeris low. “Low Traction Light”in the Index. TRUNK AJAR: This light alerts you that your trunk is not fully closed.

2-77 Trip Computer (If Equipped)

3100 and 3800 Engines

2-78 0 FUEL USED 0 OIL LIFE 0 AVG ECON ORANGE

I 3800 Supercharged Engine When you start your engine, the trip computer will display a mode.A lighted oval will appear tothe left of the mode currently being used.

2-79 Control Buttons lit next to OIL LIFE. Press and hold the RESET button for three seconds. The oil life percentage should change The trip computer has three buttons that control to 100%. its functions. RANGE: Shows how much farther you can travel with ENGMET: Press this button to change the display from the fuelyou have before refueling. English to metric units or metric to English. LOW WASHERFLUID: This light will come on when RESET Press this buttonfor two seconds to reset the your ignitionis on and the fluid containeris low. mode displayed. DOOR AJAR: If one of your doors is left ajar,a light MODE: Press this button to change the mode will appear nextto that door on the vehicle outline. being displayed. BOOST GAGE: If you have the supercharged engine, Functions this gage will showthe amount of boost yourengine FUEL USED: Shows the total amountof fuel used is receiving. since you last reset this mode. The amount can be TRUNK AJAR: If your trunk is not fully closedor displayed in gallonsor liters. open, a light will outline the trunkarea on your AVG ECON: Shows your average fuel economy since vehicle outline. you last reset this mode. TCS SWITCH: If your vehicle hasthe Traction Control OIL LIFE: Shows a percentage of the oil’s remaining System, you will havea disable switchon the far right useful life. The system predicts remaining oil life using side of your Trip Computer.Your Traction Control inputs from lengthof drives, coolant temperature, System is automatically activated when youturn the engine rpm and vehicle speed. Each timeyou get an oil ignition on. This switch will activate/deactivate the change, be sure to reset this functionso that it will give Traction Control System.If you need to disable the you an accurate percentage. system, suchas when you are stuck and are rocking your vehicle back and forth, pushthis switch. See “Stuck: In To reset the Oil Life Indicator after the oil has been Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow’’ in the Index. changed, press theMODE button until the light appears TCS OFF: This light lets you know that your Traction Low Fuel Symbol Control System has been disabled and will not limit The HUD will display the “Check Gage” when the wheel spin. See “Traction Control System Warning following arelit on the instrument panel: Light” or “Low Traction Light” in the Index. 0 Oil Warning Symbol LOW TRAC: This light will come on when your Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin. See 0 Coolant Temperature Symbol “Traction Control System”or “Low Traction Light” in 0 Charging System Symbol the Index. When you sit straight in your seat, the HUD image will Head-Up Display(If Equipped) appear straight ahead nearthe front bumper. If you havethe Head-Up When the ignition key is turned RUN, to the HUD Display (HUD), you can see image will come on. Thenthe Head-Up Display will the speedometer reading (in operate normally. English or metric units) and a brief displayof the current radio station or CD track, I NOTICE: I displayed “through” the windshield. Although the HUD image appearsto be near the front of the vehicle, do not use as it a parking aid. The HUD was not designed for that purpose.If you try to use it thatway, such as in aparking The HUD also shows these lights when they are lit on lot, you may misjudge distance and run the instrument panel: into something.

0 Turn Signal Indicators

0 High-Beam Indicator Symbol 2-81 When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will be 2. Adjust your seat, if necessary, to a displayed continually. The current radio stationor CD comfortable position. track number will only be displayed for three seconds 3. Press the top of the UP/DN switch until the HUD after the radioor CD track status changes.This will image stops moving. Then press the bottom of the happen whenever oneof the radio controls is pressed, switch until the imageis as low as possible butin either on the radio itself or on the optional steering full view. wheel controls. 4. Turn the DIM dial down until the HUD image is no adjust the HUDso you can see it properly: To brighter than necessary.To turn the HUD off, turn the DIM dial all the way down. If the sun comes out,it becomes cloudy, or if you turn on your headlamps, you may needto adjust theHUD brightness again. Polarizing sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see. I I A CAUTION: If the HUD image istoo bright, or too high in your field of view, it may take more timeto see things you need to see when it’s dark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placedlow in your field of view. 1. Start your engine and turn the DIM dial to the desired HUD image brightness.

2-82 Push the ENGMET button Care of the Head-Up Display on the trip calculator to switch the HUD speed display from English to I- metric or metric to English. If you don’t have thetrip calculator, youcan’t change 1 the display.

Clean the insideof the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or filmthat reduces the sharpness or clarityof the HUD image. To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner ona soft, clean cloth.Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit.

2-83 If You Can’t See theHUD Image When the Ignition Power Drop Feature Is On Your vehicle is equippedwith auxiliary power leads. 0 Is anything covering the HUD unit? These leads can be used to power aftermarket electrical 0 Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough? equipment addedto your vehicle. Theyare located on the passenger’s sideof the vehicle, below the glove box. Is the HUD image adjusted to the proper height? For additional information on accessing these leads and Still no HUD image? Check thefuse in the I/P electrical hookup, please referto your service manual. Electronics position in the instrument panel fuse block. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the Index. If the HUD Image IsNot Clear Is the HUD image too bright? Are the windshield and HUD lens clean? Your windshield is part of the HUD system.If you ever have to havea new windshield, be sure to get one designed for HUD. If you don’t, theHUD image may look blurred and outof focus.

2-84 P Section 3 Comfort Controls andAudio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3-2 Comfort Controls 3-19 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player 3-2 Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls (If Equipped) 3-4 Air Conditioning with Automatic and 3-22 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Auxiliary Temperature Control(If Equipped) Equalizer (If Equipped) 3-8 Ventilation System 3-24 Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped) 3-9 Rear Window Defogger 3-27 Theft-Deterrent Feature 3-10 Audio System 3-29 Audio Steering Wheel Controls(If Equipped) 3-10 Setting the Clockfor AM-FM Stereo 3-30 Understanding Radio Reception 3- 10 Setting the Clock for All Systems Except 3-30 Tips About Your Audio System AM-FM Stereo 3-3 1 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3-1 1 AM-FM Stereo 3-32 Care of Your Compact Discs 3-12 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3-32 Care of Your Compact Disc Player (If Equipped) 3-32 Fixed Mast Antenna 3-16 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Playerand 3-32 Backglass Antenna (If Equipped) Equalizer (If Equipped) Comfort Controls Temperature Knob The center knob changes the temperatureof the air Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls coming through the system.Turn this knob toward red (to the right)for warmer air. Turn it toward blue (to the left) for cooler air. Mode Knob The rightknob has several settings to control the direction of airflow: MAX: This setting recirculates muchof the air inside your vehicle and sendsit through the instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning compressor willrun automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below38°F (3.3"C). (Even when the With this system, you can control the heating, cooling compressor is running, you can control the temperature.) +e and ventilation in your vehicle.The system works best if /r UPPER: This setting brings in outsideair and you keep your windows closed while using it. directs it through the instrument panel outlets. +e Fan Knob 'H BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in outsideair and The left knob selects the amount airof you want. To turn directs it two ways. Half of theair is directed through the fan off, turn theknob to OFF. The fan must be on to the instrument panel outlets. Mostof the remaining air is run the air conditioning compressor. directed through the floorducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents.

3-2 0 Air Conditioning +# FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor.The remaining airflow On very hot days, open the windows long enoughto let comes outof the defroster and side window vents. hot, insideair escape. This reduces the timefor the w vehicle to cool down. ?dDEFOG: This setting allows halfof the air to go For quick cool-down on very hot days, useMAX with to the floor ducts and halfto the defroster and side the temperature knob allthe way in the blue area.If this window vents. setting is used for long periodsof time, theair in your DEFROST This setting directs mostof the air vehicle may become toodry. through the defroster andside window vent. Some of the For normal cooling on hot days, use UPPER withthe air goes to the floor ducts and the side window vent. Thetemperature knob in the blue area and A/Cthe button air conditioning compressor will run automaticallyin pushed in. The system will bring in outsideair and this setting unless the outside temperatureis below cool it. 38°F (3.3"C). On cool, but sunny days,the sun may warm your upper Air Conditioning Compressor Button body, but your lower body may not be warm enough. You can use BI-LEVEL with the temperatureknob in Press the A/C button to operate theair conditioning the middle and theA/C button pushed in. The system compressor. The indicator light above the button will will bring in outside airand direct it to your upper body, glow when the button is pressed. You don't have to while sending slightly warmedair to your lower body. press the button to runthe compressor in MAX or You may notice this temperature difference moreat DEFROST because it will already be running in some times than others. these modes.

3-3 Heating Air Conditioning with Automatic On cold daysuse FLOOR with the temperatureknob all and Auxiliary Temperature Control the way in the red area.The system will bring in outside (If Equipped) air, heat it and send it to the floor ducts. If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater,you can use it to help your system provide warmair faster when it’s cold outside0 OF(- 18 O C) or lower. An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system use to provide heat.See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. Ventilation For mild outside temperatures when little heatingor cooling is needed, use UPPER, with the A/C button off, to direct outsideair through your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the flow-through ventilation system described With this system, you set a “desired cabin” temperature. later in this section. You can then eitherlet the system automatically control airflow direction and amount(to maintain the desired Defogging and Defrosting cabin temperature) or you can manually adjust it. The system works bestif you keep your windows closed Your system has two settings for clearing the frontand while using it. side windows. To defiost the windows quickly, use DEFROST with the temperature knob all the way in the red area. To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean, useDEFOG.

3-4 Automatic Control Dual Zone Button Light For the most efficient operation, you should set the The dual zone button light indicates whether the system system temperature and press AUTO.The system will is in single zone or dual zone operation. When there is select the bestfan speed and airflow settings to keep you no desire for dual zone operation, push thelit dual zone comfortable. The air conditioning compressor will runif button to return to single zone operation.The dual zone the outside temperature is above OF 38 (3.3 "C). You may button light willgo off. notice a delay of three fourto minutes before thefan The system will operate to achieve your comfortset comes on. point as quickas possible. If you set the temperature for 60°F (16°C) or 90°F (32"C), the fan will go to it's Driver's Temperature Knob highest speed, unless you manually selecta lower speed. The left knob sets the temperaturefor the entire system The system will maintain full cold or full hot operation when the lighton DUAL button isn't lit.If the lightis at these settings. lit, the knob sets the temperature for the driver. the Turn Cold Weather Example:When you start the vehiclein knob toward red (to the right) to raisethe desired cabin cold weather, (below freezing) after being parked temperature. Turn it toward blue (to the left) to lower or overnight. If your Driver Set Temperature is 73°F the temperature. The display will show your selection (23°C) and you are in Full Automatic mode, the system for a few seconds, then the outside temperature will will automatically movethe temperature doorsto show or be displayed. full hot. The blower will startout at a low speed andthe blower speed will increaseas the engine warms up. The .x: - J-refs Temperature Knob air will be delivered to the floor.As the interior of the The right knob sets the desired cabin temperaturefor the vehicle warms up to your desired comfort point,the passenger and will automatically forcethe system into a blower will decrease andthe temperature door will dual zone operation, lighting the dual zone button light. move to a cooler positionto maintain your desired Turn the right knob toward red (to the right) to raise the comfort. As the cabin warms up or the SUR load temperature. Turn it toward blue (to the left)to lower increases the system could switch air to delivered to the the temperature. individual to the windshield and the floor (Defog mode). 3-5 Hot Weather Example:When you start the vehicle in Mode Button hot weather, 80°F (27°C)or after being parked during The center panel has several settings to controlthe the day in full sun, if your DriverSet Temperature is direction of airflow when the system notis in AUTO. 73°F (23°C)and you arein Full Automatic mode, the The indicator light on the buttonwill glow when the system will automatically move the temperature doors to button is pressed. To access the various modes available, full cold. The blower will beat low speed momentarily continue to press the MODE button untilthe desired and then to the high speed.The air intake willbe mode appears on the display. recirculated for maximum cooling performance. As the interior of the vehicle cools down to your desired If you prefer to manually control the heating, cooling comfort point,the blower will decrease and the and ventilation in your vehicle, push UPPER,BI-LEV, temperature door will move to a warmer position to LOWER, DEFOG or DEE AUTO willgo off the maintain your desired comfort.As the cabin cools down display. Set the system to the temperature and fan speed or the sun load decreases the system could switchair to you want. The system willtry to maintain the delivered to A/C vents and the floor (Bi-level mode). temperature you set using the mode you select.The following suggestions will helpthe system run more Manual Control efficiently in manual mode. Fan Buttons RECIRC: This setting recirculates muchof the air inside your vehicle and sendsit through the The fan buttons select the amountof air you want when instrument panel outlets. Theair conditioning the system is not in AUTO. The display will show the compressor will run automatically inthis setting unless fan speed by illuminating a maximumof seven fan bars. the outside temperatureis below 38°F (3.3"C). +* Air Conditioning /J UPPER: This setting brings in the outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets. On very hot days, open the windows long enoughto let +e hot, insideair escape. This reduces the time for the '#BI-LEV: This setting brings in the outside air and vehicle to cool down. directs it two ways. Half of the air is directed through For quick cool-down on very hot days, useRECIRC. If the instrument panel outlets. Mostof the remaining air is this setting is usedfor long periods of time, theair in directed through the floor ducts andlittle a to the defrost your vehicle may becometoo dry. and side window vents. For normal cooling on hot days, useUPPER with the LOWER: This setting sends mostof the air A/C button pushed in.The system will bringin outside through the ducts near the floor.The remaining airflow air and cool it. comes out ofthe defroster and side window vents. On cool, but sunny days,the sun may warm your upper w body, but lower body may not be warm enough. DEFOG: This setting allows halfof the to go your air You can use BI-LEV with the A/C button pushed in. to the ducts and half to the defroster andside floor The system will bring inoutside air and directit to your window vents. upper body, while sending slightly warmedair to your DEF: This setting directs mostof the air through lower body.You may notice this temperature difference the defrost vent. Someof the air goes to the floor ducts more at some times than others. and the side window vents. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperatureis below 38°F (3.3"C).

3-7 Heating Ventilation System On cold days use LOWER.The system will bring in outside air, heat it and sendit to the floor ducts. If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use it to helpyour system provide warmair faster when it’s cold outside0°F (- 18°C) or lower. An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system uses to provide heat. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. Ventilation For mild, outside temperatures when little heatingor cooling is needed, use UPPER with the A/C button off, Adjust the directionof airflow by moving the to direct outsideair through your vehicle.Your vehicle louvered vents. also has the flow-through ventilation system described later in this section. Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle whenit is moving. Outside Defogging and Defrosting air will also enter the vehicle whenthe air conditioning Your system has two settings for clearing the front and fan is running. side windows.To defrost the windows quickly, useDEE To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean, use DEFOG.

3-8 Ventilation Tips Rear Window Defogger 0 Keep the hood and frontair inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction, such as leaves.The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chanceof fogging the insideof your windows. 0 When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest speed for a few seconds before drivingoff. This helps clear the intake ductsof snow and moisture and reduces the chance of foggingthe inside of your windows. 0 Keep the air path underthe front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulate throughout Your comfort control system has a button to operate your vehicle. your rear window defogger.The electronic comfort control system has a button markedREAR. The system with automatic temperature control has a button marked R.DEF. The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to Audio Systems remove fog from therear window. Press the button to turn the rear defogger on.It will turn itself off after Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed about ten minutes. to operate easily andgive years of listening pleasure, You will get the most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint If you turn it on again, the rear defogger will only run yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco for aboutfive minutes beforeturning off. You can also Electronics system cando and how to operate all its turn it off by pressing the button again. controls, to be sure you’re getting the mostout of the Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle license advanced engineering that wentinto it. or decal across the defogger grid. Setting the Clock for AM-FM Stereo Press SET. Within five seconds, pressand hold the NOTICE: SEEK down arrow until the correcthour appears on the display. Press and hold the SEEK up arrow until the Don’t use a razor blade or anythingelse sharp on correct minute appears on the display. the insideof the rear window.If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid,and the Setting the Clock for All SystemsExcept repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. AM-FM Stereo Press and holdHR until the correcthour appears. Press and hold MIN until the correctminute appears. There will be a two-second delay before the clockgoes into time-set mode, and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode.

3-10 AM-FM Stereo Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch betweenAM and FM. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow togo to the next higher or lower station and stay there. PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttonslet you return to your favorite stations.You can set upto 14 stations (sevenAM and seven FM). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. Playing the Radio 3. Tune in the desired station. PWR-VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) off and controls the volume.To turn the radio on and to increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turnto itthe 5. Press one of the four numbered pushbuttons within left to decrease volume and to turn the radiooff. five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return. RCL: Press this knob to recall the station being played or to display the clock. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-11 In addition to the four stations already set,up to AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player three more stationsmay be preset on each band by (If Equipped) pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons atthe same time, within five seconds. Wheneveryou press the same buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat the stepsfor each pair of pushbuttons.

Setting the Tone BASS: Slide the lever upor down to increaseor decrease bass. Playing the Radio TREB: Slide the leverup or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may POWER-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on want to decrease the treble. and off. To increase volume, turn the knobto the right. Turn it to the leftto decrease volume. Adjusting theSpeakers RECALL: Display the timewith the ignition off by BALANCE: Turn the control behind the upperknob to pressing this button.When the radio is playing, press move the soundto the left or right speakers. The middle this knob to recall the station frequency. position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound tothe front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Finding a Station TREBLE: Slide the leverto the rightor left to increase AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM, FM1 or decrease treble.If a station is weak or noisy, you may and FM2. The display shows your selection. want to decrease the treble. TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to Adjusting the Speakers choose radio stations. Pushthe knob back into its stored BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this knob position when you’re not using it. to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle SEEK: Press the up or down arrow goto to the next position balances the sound between the speakers. higher or lower station and stay there. FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet knob to movethe sound to the front orrear speakers. The you return to your favorite stations.You can set upto middle position balances the sound between the speakers. 18 stations (sixAM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when 1. Turn the radio on. you’re not using them. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. Playing a CassetteTape 3. Tune in the desired station. Your tape player is builtto work best with tapes that are 4. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttons until 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than SET appears on the display. Wheneveryou press that that are so thin they may not work well in this player. numbered button, the station youset will return. While the tapeis playing, use theVOL, FADE, BAL, 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. BASS and TREB controlsjust as you do for the radio. The display will show an arrow to show which sideof Setting the Tone the tape is playing. Whenthe down indicator arrow is BASS: Slide the lever tothe right or left to increase or lit, selections listed onthe bottom side of the cassette are decrease bass. playing. When the up arrowis lit, selections listed on the top sideof the cassette are playing.The tape player

3-13 automatically begins playing the otherside when it NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to reaches the end of the tape. search for the next selection on the tape.If you hold the button, the player will continue moving forwardthrough If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape won’t play because of error. the tape. Your tape must have atleast three secondsof an silence between each selectionfor NEXT or SEEK to E10: The tape is tight and the player can’tturn the work. The tape directionarrow blinks duringNEXT or tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the SEEK operation. Press NEXT or theSEEK up arrow to open end down and try to turn the right hubto the stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or left with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat.If SEEK operation. the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be usedin the player. PROG (3): Press this buttonto play the other side Try a new tape to make sure your player is of the tape. working properly. 00 (4): Press this button to reduce background Ell: The tape is broken. Trya new tape. noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display. If any error occurs repeatedlyor if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured under a license displays an error number, write it down and provide it to from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby your dealerwhen reporting the problem. and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. PREV (1): Press this button or theSEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape.Your tape REV (5): Press this buttonto reverse the tape rapidly. must have at least three seconds of silence between each Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will selection forPREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. arrow blinks duringPREV or SEEK operation. Press You may select stations duringREV operation by using PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The SEEK or TUNE. sound will mute duringPREV or SEEK operation.

3-14 FWD (6): Press this buttonto advance quickly to CD AdapterKits another part of the tape. Press the button again to return It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected tape player after activating the bypass feature youron station while the tape advances.You may select stations tape player. during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE. To activate the bypass feature, use the followingsteps: AM-FM: Press this buttonto play the radio when a tape is in the player. 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. TAPEFLAY: Press this button to change to the tape 2. Turn the radio off. function when the radiois on. The tape symbol with an 3. Press and hold the TAPEPLAY button forthree arrow will appear on the display whenthe tape is active. seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash To return to playing the radio, press theAM-FM button. for two seconds, indicatingthe feature is active. EJECT Press this buttonto remove the tape. The radio 4. Insert the adapter.It will power up the radioand will play. EJECT may be activated with either the begin playing. ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignitionoff if this button is pressed first. This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needsto be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT forfive seconds to reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display--- to show the indicator was reset.

3-15 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Finding a Station and Equalizer (If Equipped) AM-FM: Press this button to switch betweenAM, FM1 and FM2.The display shows your selection. TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob backinto its stored position when you're not using it. SEEK: Press theup or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station andstay there. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let F wo you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. Playing the Radio 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. POWER-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on 3. Tune in the desired station. and off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. 4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons until Turn it to the left to decrease volume. SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that RECALL: Display the time with the ignitionoff by numbered button, the station you set will return. pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. . this knob to recall the station frequency. .. Setting the Tone EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizer is partof your audio system. Slide the leversup to boost or down to reduce frequency range. 3-16 Adjusting the Speakers If E and a number appearon the radio display, the tape won’t play becauseof an error. BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the leftor right speakers. The middle 0 E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the position balances the sound betweenthe speakers. tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnit to open end down andtry to turn the right hubto the move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle left with a pencil. Turnthe tape over and repeat.If position balances the sound betweenthe speakers. the hubs do notturn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be usedthe in player. Push theseknobs back into their stored positions when Try a new tape to make sure your player is you’re not using them. working properly. Playing a CassetteTape Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape. Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are If any error occurs repeatedly or an if error can’tbe 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio that areso thin they may not work wellin this player. displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem. While the tapeis playing, use the VOL,FADE and BAL controls just as you do for the radio. The display will PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrowto show an arrow to show which sideof the tape is playing. search for the previous selection onthe tape. Your tape When the down indicator arrow lit,is selections listed must have at least three secondsof silence between each on the bottom side of the cassette are playing. When the selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction up arrow is lit, selections listed on the top sideof the arrow blinks during PREV orSEEK operation. Press cassette are playing. The tape player automatically PREV or the SEEK down arrow stopto searching. The begins playing the other side when it reaches the endof sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation. the tape.

3-17 NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK uparrow to FWD (6):Press this button to advance quicklyto search for the next selection on the tape.If you hold the another part of the tape. Press the button againto return button, the player will continue moving forward through to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected the tape. Yourtape must have at least three seconds of station while the tape advances.You may select stations silence between each selectionfor NEXT or SEEK to during FWD operation by using SEEKor TUNE. work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio whena tape SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to is in the player. stop searching. The soundwill mute during NEXTor SEEK operation. TAPEPLAX Press this button to changeto the tape function when the radiois on. The tape symbol with an PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side arrow will appear on the display when thetape is active. of the tape. To return to playing the radio, press theAM-FM button. 00 (4): Press this button to reduce background EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear will play. EJECT may be activated witheither the on the display. ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured undera license radio off if this button is pressedfist. from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby CLN: If this message appears on the display, the and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby cassette tape player needs beto cleaned. It will still play Laboratories Licensing Corporation. tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as possible to REV (5): Press this button to reversethe tape rapidly. prevent damage to the tapes and player.See “Care of Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will Your Cassette Tape Player”in the Index. After you clean play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. the player, press and hold EJECTfor fiveseconds to You may select stations duringREV operation by using reset the CLN indicator. Theradio will display--- to SEEK orTUNE. show the indicator was reset.

3-18 CD Adapter Kits AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette (If Equipped) tape player after activatingthe bypass feature on your tape player. To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps: 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. 2. Turn the radio off. 3. Press and hold the TAPEPLAY buttonfor three seconds. The tape symbol on the display willflash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active. 4. Insert the adapter. It will power theup radio and begin playing. This override routine will remain active until EJECT Playing the Radio is pressed. POWER-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume,turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to decrease volume. RECALL: Display the time with the ignitionoff by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, pressthis knob to recall the station frequency.

3-19 Finding a Station TREBLE: Slide the leverto the right or left to increase or decrease treble.If a station is weak or noisy, you may AM-FM: Press this button to switch betweenAM, FM1 want to decrease the treble. and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to Adjusting the Speakers choose radio stations. Push the knob backinto its stored BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to position when you’re not using it. move the sound to the leftor right speakers. The middle SEEK: Press the upor down arrow to go to the next position balances the sound between the speakers. higher or lower station and stay there. FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let move the sound to the front or rear speakers.The middle you return to your favorite stations.You can set upto position balances the sound between the speakers. 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: Push these knobs back into their stored positions when 1. Turn the radio on. you’re not using them. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. Playing a Compact Disc 3. Tune in the desired station. Insert a disc partwayinto the slot, label side up.The 4. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttons until player will pull it in.The compact disc symbol will SET appears on the display. Whenever you press thatappear on the display.If the ignition and the radio are numbered button, the station you set will return. on, the disc will begin playing.CD will appear on the display next to the compactdisc symbol. If you want to 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT. Setting the Tone The integral CD player can playthe smaller 8 cm “single” discs. Full-size compactdiscs and the smaller BASS: Slide the lever to the right or leftto increase or discs are loaded in the same manner. decrease bass.

3-20 If you’re driving on a very rough roador if it’s very hot, REV (5): Press and holdthis button to quickly reverse the disc may not play andE (error) and a number may within a track. Releaseit to play the passage.You will appear on the radio display.If the disc comes out,it hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show could be that: elapsed time.

0 The disc is upside down. FWD (6): Press and holdthis button to quickly advance within a track.You will hear sound ata reduced volume. 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. The display will show elapsed time. 0 The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and again.) RECALL: Press this button tosee what track is try currently playing. PressRECALL again within five If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be seconds to see how long the track has been playing. corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio When a new track starts to play, the track number will displays an error number, writeit down and provideit to also appear. PressRECALL a third time andthe time of your dealer when reportingthe problem. day will be displayed. PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc go to the startof the current trackif more than eight is playing. The disc willstop but remain inthe player. seconds have played.If you hold the button or pressit more than once, the player will continue moving back CDPLAY: Press this button to change to the disc through the disc. function when the radiois on. EJECT: Press this buttonto remove the disc or stop the NEXT (2): Press this button or theSEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track.If you hold the button or disc and switch to the radio.EJECT will work with the press it more than once, the player will continue moving radio off. forward through the disc. RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.The display will show RDM. Press RDM again to turnoff random play. AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Finding a Station and Equalizer (If Equipped) AM-FM: Press this button to switch betweenAM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnit to choose radio stations. Push the knob backinto its stored position when you’re not using it. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1and six FMZ). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. Playing the Radio 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. POWER-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on 3. Tune in the desired station. and off. To increase volume,turn the knob to the right. 4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons until Turn it to the left to decrease volume. SET appears on the display. Wheneveryou press that RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station numbered button, the stationyou set will return. being playedor to display the clock.If you press the 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. knob when the ignitionis off, the clock will showfor a few seconds. Setting the Tone EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizer is partof your audio system. Slide the leversup to boost or down to reduce frequency range. 3-22 Adjusting the Speakers If you’re driving ona very rough roador if it’s very hot, the disc may not play andE (error) and a number may BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn itto appear on the radio display.If the disc comes out,it move the sound to the leftor right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. could be that: FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn itto 0 The disc is upside down. move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. position balances the sound between the speakers. The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and Push these knobs back into their stored positions when try again.) you’re not using them. If any error occurs repeatedly or an if error can’tbe Playing a Compact Disc corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, writeit down and provideit to Insert a disc partway intothe slot, label side up.The your dealer when reporting the problem. player will pull it in. If the ignition andthe radio are on, the disc will begin playing.If you want to insert a disc PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to when the ignition is off, first press EJECT. go to the start of the current trackif more than eight seconds have played.If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. NEXT (2): Press this buttonor the SEEK up arrow to go to the startof the next track.If you hold the button or press it more than once,the player will continue moving forward through the disc.

3-23 RDM (3): Press this buttonto hear the tracks in random, Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped) rather than sequential, order. The display will show RDM, Press RDM again to turn off random play. With the optional compactdisc changer, you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse played using the trays supplied in the magazine. within a track. Releaseit to play the passage.You will hear sound ata reduced volume. The display will show The small discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially elapsed time. designed trays. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance You must fist load the magazine withdiscs before you within a track. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. can play a compact disc. Eachof the 12 trays holdsone The display will show elapsed time. disc. Press the button on the backof the magazine and pull gently on oneof the trays. Load the trays from RECALL: Press this button to see what track is bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down. currently playing. Press RECALL again within five If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play seconds to see how longthe track has been playing. and an error will occur. Gently pushthe tray back into When a new track starts to play, the track number will the magazine slot. Repeat this procedurefor loading up also appear. Press RECALLa third time and the timeof to 12 discs in the magazine. day will be displayed. Once you have loaded thediscs in the magazine, slide AM-FM: Press this buttonto play the radio whena disc open the doorof the compact disc(CD) changer. Push is playing. The discwill stop but remain in the player. the magazine into the changerin the direction of the CDPLAY Press this button to change to the disc arrow marked on top of the magazine. function when the radio is on. Close the door by sliding it the all way to the left.If the EJECT: Press this button to remove thedisc or stop the door is left partiallyopen, the changer will not operate disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will workwith the and an error will occur. Whenthe door is closed, the radio off. changer will begin checkingfor discs in the magazine. This will continuefor up to two minutes depending on the numberof discs loaded. 3-24 To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the changer doorall the way open. The magazine will compact disc playeror changer, the following conditions automatically eject. Remember to keepthe door closed may have caused the error: whenever possible to keepdirt and dust from getting 0 The road is too rough. The disc should play when the inside the changer. road is smoother. All of the CDfunctions are controlled by the radio 0 The disc is dirty, scratchedor wet. buttons exceptfor ejecting the magazine. Whenever a CD magazine with discsis loaded in the changer, the The disc is label side up.If so, load the disc label compact disc symbol will appear onthe radio display. If side down. the CD changer is checking the magazinefor CDs, the The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and compact disc symbol willflash on the display untilthe try again. changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, CD will appear inthe bottom left corner and a disc and track 0 The CD changer door is open. Completely close the number will be displayed.The disc numbers are listed door to restore normal operation. on the front of the magazine. An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer. Compact Disc Errors Try the magazine again with a disc loaded oneon of the trays. If E and a number appearon the display, an error has If any error occurs repeatedlyor if an error cannot be occurred andthe compact disc temporarily cannot play. corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio The CD changer will sendan error message to the displays an error number, writeit down and provideit to receiver to indicate: your dealer when reporting the problem. I' 0 E30: Disc Label Side Up 0 E34: CD Changer Door Open 0 E35: CD Changer Cartridge Empty

3-25 Playing a Compact Disc FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be start of the current trackif more than eight seconds have displayed to helpyou find thecorrect passage. played. Press PREV againto go to the previous track RECALL: Press this button to see what trackis on the disc. currently playing. PressRECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. NEXT (2): Press this buttonto advance to the next track EL on the disc. TM will appear on the display whenin elapsed time mode. When a new track starts to play,the track number PROG (3): Press this button to select the next discin will also appear. PressRECALL a third time and the the magazine. If a CD cannot be played, its number time of day will be displayed. will be skipped when selecting discs while using the PROG button. SEEK: Press the SEEK down mow while playinga CD to go back to the start of the current trackif more than RANDOM (4): Press this button to enter the random eight seconds have played.If you press it again, the play mode. RDM will appear on the display. While in changer will go to previous tracks. Press theSEEK up this mode, the trackson the discs willbe played in arrow andit will go to the next higher trackon the disc. random order. If you press PROG or SEEK while in the random mode, discs and tracks will be scanned TAPEPLAY: Press this button to playa CD if you have randomly. Press this button again to off the random a magazine loadedin the changer and the radio is turn playing. To return to the radio whilea CD is playing, feature and return tonormal operation. press AM-FM.You can also press this button to switch REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse between a cassette tape andCD, if both are loaded. within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed timewill be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

3-26 Theft-Deterrent Feature 2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORYor RUN. THEFTLOCK@ is designed to discourage theft of your 3. Turn the radiooff. radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio4. Press the 1 and4 buttons together. Hold them down functions whenever battery power is removed. until --- shows on the display. Next you willuse the The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or secret code number which you havewritten down. ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the 5. Press MIN and000 will appear on the display. radio is not protectedby the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. 6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display LOC to indicatea locked condition anytime battery 7. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree power is removed. If your battery loses powerfor any with your code. reason, you must unlockthe radio with the secret code 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the before it will operate. code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show REP to letyou know that you Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code. secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is 9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show recommended that you read through all nine steps SEC to letyou know that your radio is secure. before starting the procedure. Note that with the ignition off, the THEFTLOCK NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse indicator will flash, indicating a secured radio. between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto time and you must start the procedure over at Step4. 1. Write down any three or four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle. 3-27 Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Power Loss Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than Enter your secret code as follows; pauseno more than 15 seconds between steps: 15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. 1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. 2. Turn the radio off. 2. Press and 000 will appear on the display. MIN 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down 3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree until SEC shows onthe display. with your code. 4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display. 4. Press HR to make the firstone or two digits agree 5. Press MIN again to make the last twodigits agree with your code. with your code. 5. Press AM-FM after you have confiied that the 6. Press HR to make the fist one or two digits agree code matches the secret code you have written down. with your code. The displaywill show SEC,indicating the radiois now operable and secure. 7. Press AM-FM after you have confiied that the code matches the secretcode you have written down. If you enter the wrong code eight times,INOP will The display will show ---,indicating that the radiois appear on the display.You will have to waitan hour no longer secured. with the ignition on before youcan try again. When you try again, you will onlyhave three more chances If the code entered is incorrect,SEC will appear on the (eight triesper chance) to enter the correct code display. The radio will remain secureduntil the correct before INOP appears. code is entered. If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer. When battery poweris removed and later applied to a secured radio, theradio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display.

3-28 To unlock a secured radio,see “Unlocking the VOLUME: Press the up or down arrow to increase or Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera Power Loss” earlier in decrease volume. this section. PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or Audio Steering Wheel Controls compact disc when the radiois playing. (If Equipped) MUTE: Press this buttonto silence the system. Press it again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound. SEEK: Press the up arrow to tuneto the next radio station and the downarrow to tune to the previous radio 3 station. If a cassette tapeor compact disc is playing, the r. player will advanceto the next selection with the up arrow and goto the previous selection with the down arrow. PRESET: Press this buttonto play a stationyou have programmed on the radio preset buttons. When a cassette tapeis playing, press this button to change tape sides. If you have thetrunk mounted CD player, press this button to advance tothe next disc in the magazine. If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain radio and remote playback functions using the buttons AM-FM: Press this button to chooseAM, FM1or FM2. on your steering wheel. If a cassette tape or compact discis playing, it will stop and the radio will play.

3-29 Understanding Radio Reception To help avoid hearing lossor damage: AM 0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. 0 Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, and clearly. especially at night.The longer range, however, can cause stationsto interfere with each other.AM can pick up noise from thingslike storms and power lines. Try NOTICE: reducing the treble to reducethis noise if you ever getit. FM Stereo Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile FM stereo will give you the best sound, FM but signals telephone or two-way radio be sureyou can will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall -- buildings or hills can interfere withFM signals, causing add what you want. If you can, it's very the sound to come and go. important to doit properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of Tips About Your Audio System your vehicle's engine, Delco Electronics radio or Hearing damage from loud noiseis almost undetectable other systems, and even damage them. Your until it is too late. Your hearing can adaptto higher vehicle's systems may interfere with the volumes of sound. Sound that seemsnormal can be loud operation of sound equipment that hasbeen and harmful toyour hearing. Take precautionsby added improperly. adjusting the volume control on your radio ato safe So, before adding sound equipment, checkwith sound level before your hearing adapts toit. your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits.

3-30 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject becauseyour unit A tape player thatis not cleaned regularly can cause is equipped with a cuttape detection feature and a cleaning reduced sound quality, ruined cassettesor a damaged cassette may appear as broken. To prevent the cleaning mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cassette from being ejected, use the following steps. cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY properly or may cause failure of the tape player. 2. Turn theradio off. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 3. Press and hold the TAPEFLAY button for three 50 hours of use. Yourradio may display CLN to indicate seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash that you have used your tape player for50 hours without for two seconds. resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on 4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. the display, your cassette tape player needs to be 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should cleanas it recommended cleaning time. soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, thecut tape known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape detection feature is active again. player at fault.If this other cassette hasno improvement You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type in sound quality, clean the tape player. cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean The recommended cleaning method for your cassette the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. the tape headas the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning The recommended cleaning cassette is available through cassette is not recommended. your dealership(GM Part No. 12344789). After you clean the player, press and hold EJECTfor five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. 3-31 Cassettes are subject towear and the sound quality may Backglass Antenna(If Equipped) degrade over time. Always make sure the cassettetape is in Your antenna is integrated with your window good condition before you have your tape player serviced. AM-FM rear defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that the Care of Your Compact Discs inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surface Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases is damaged,it could interfere radio reception. or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight with and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and NOTICE: clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Be sure neverto touch the signal surface when handling Do not try to clear frostor other material from discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edgesor the the inside of the rear window with a razor blade edge of the hole and the outer edge. or anything else thatis sharp. This may damage Care of Your Compact Disc Player the rear defoggergrid and affect your radio’s ability to pickup stations clearly. The repairs The use ofCD lens cleaner discsis not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. lubricants internal to theCD mechanism. Because this antenna is built into your rear window, therea is Fixed Mast Antenna reduced risk of damage caused by car washes and vandals. The fixed mast antenna can withstand mostcar washes If you choose to adda cellular telephone to your vehicle, without being damaged.If the mast should ever become and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be sure slightly bent, you can straightenit out by hand.If the mast is that you do not damage the gridlines for the AM-FM badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it. antenna. There is enough space between the lines to Check every once ina while tobe sure the mastis still attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering tightened to the rear quarter panel. with radio reception.

3-32 b NOTES

3-33 @b NOTES

3-34 Section 4 Your Driving and theRoad

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kindsof roads and in varying weather conditions. We’vealso included manyother useful tips on driving.

4-2 Defensive Driving 4- 19 Driving in Rainand on Wet Roads 4-3 Drunken Driving 4-22 City Driving 4-6 Control of a Vehicle 4-23 Freeway Driving 4-6 Braking 4-25 Highway Hypnosis 4-12 Steering 4-25 Hill and Mountain Roads 4- 14 Off-Road Recovery 4-27 Winter Driving 4-15 Passing 4-3 1 Loading Your Vehicle 4-16 Loss of Control 4-33. Towing a Trailer 4-17 DrivingNightat

4-1 Defensive driving really means “be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roadsor freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.’’ Assume that pedestrians or otherdrivers are goingto be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preveztable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance.It’s the best defensivedriving maneuver, in both city and rural driving.You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task -- such as concentratingon a cellular telephone call, reading,or reaching for something Defensive Driving on the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting The best advice anyone can give about drivingis: injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo things like this, or Drive defensively. pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. Please start with a very important safety devicein your These simple defensive driving techniques could save Pontiac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) your life.

4-2 Drunken Driving The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is what if people do? How muchis “too much” if the a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributorto driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less thanmany might the highway death toll, claiming thousandsof victims think. Although it depends on each person and situation, every year. here is some general information on the problem. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone a vehicle: who is drinking depends upon four things:

Judgment 0 The amount of alcohol consumed

0 MuscularCoordination 0 The drinker’s body weight

0 Vision 0 The amount of food that is consumed before and Attentiveness. during drinking Police records show that almost halfof all motor 0 The length sf time it has taken the drinker to vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, consume the alcohol. these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking According to the American Medical Association, a and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use (355 ml) bottles of beerin an hour will end up with a of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured. BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the same BACby drinking three 4-ounce(1 20 ml) glasses adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so of wine or three mixed drinks if each had- 1/2 1 ounces they never drive after drinking. For persons under21, (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, ginor vodka. it’s against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.

4-3 Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means thata woman generally will reacha higher BAC level thana man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legallimit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S.states, and throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’seven lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers inthe United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour).Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. But the ability to drive is affected well belowa BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired ata BAC approaching It’s the amount ofalcohol that counts. For example,if 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All the same persondrank three double martinis(3 ounces drivers are impairedat BAC levels above0.05 percent. or 90 ml of liquor each) withinan hour, the person’s Statistics show that the chanceof being in a collision BAC would be close to0.12 percent. A person who increases sharply for drivers who havea BAC of consumes foodjust before or during drinkingwill have a 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of somewhat lower BAC level. 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of havinga There is a gender difference, too.Women generally have collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof a lower relative percentageof body water than men. this driver havinga collision is 12 times greater; ata level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 times greater!

4-4 The body takes aboutan hour to rid itselfof the alcohol in one drink.No amount of coffee or numberof cold CAUTION: showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the A right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to - take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous. A person with even a moderateBAC might notbe able Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. judgment can beaffected by even a small amount There’s somethingelse about drinking and driving that of alcohol. You can havea serious -- or even many people don’t know. Medical research shows that fatal -- collision if you drive afterdrinking. alcohol in a person’s systemcan make crash injuries Please don’t drink and drive or ridewith a driver worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cordor who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if heart. This means that when anyone who has been you’re with a group, designatea driver who will drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that not drink. person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involvesperception time and you want it togo. They are the brakes, the steering and reaction time. the accelerator. All three systems have doto their work First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. at the places where the tires meet the road. That’s perception time. Then you haveto bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long astwo or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a pat. So do alcohol, drugsand frustration. But evenin 314 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could bea lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distancesvary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavementor gravel); the conditionof the road (wet,dry, icy); tire tread; the conditionof your brakes; the weightof the vehicle and the amount of brakeforce applied. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snowor ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you canlose control of your vehicle. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between advanced electronic braking system that will help hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you prevent a braking skid. do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the When you start your engine, or when you beginto drive traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means may hear a momentary motor or clicking noisewhile better braking and longer brake life. this test is goingon, and you may even notice thatyour If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake brake pedal moves or pulses a little.This is normal. normally but don’t pump your brakes. If youdo, the If there’s a problem with the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine anti-lock brake system,this stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But warning light will stay on. you will useit when you brake. Oncethe power assist is See “Anti-Lock Brake used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal System Warning Light” in will be harderto push. the Index. The anti-lock system can changethe brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computeris programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps outin front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. You can steer around the obstacle while brakinghard. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at both rear wheels.

4-8 Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t changethe time you need Traction Control System (With3800 to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease Supercharged Engine) stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have timeto apply your brakes Your vehicle has a traction control system thatlimits wheel if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave spin. This is especially useful in slippery roadconditions. enough room up ahead tostop, even though you have The system operates onlyif it senses that oneor both of anti-lock brakes. the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and Using Anti-Lock reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down This light will comeon firmly and let anti-lock workfor you. You may feel a when your traction control slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but LOW system is limiting wheel this is normal. spin. See “Traction Control TRAC System Warning Light” in When your anti-lock system the index. is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a brakingskid, this light will come on. You may feel or hear the system working,but this is normal. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins tolimit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allowyou to safely useit again, you may reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.) This light should come To turn the systemoff, on briefly when you start press the TCS button on TCS the engine. If it stays on or the far right end of the comes on whileyou are trip computer. OFF driving, there’s a problem with your traction control system.

See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. The traction control system automatically comes on The traction control system warning light will come whenever you start your vehicle.To limit wheel spin, on and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions, you should when you press the button, the warning light will come always leave the system on. But you canturn the on -- and the system will shut-off instantly. It will wait traction control systemoff if you ever need to. (You until there’s no longera current need to limit should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck wheel spin. in sand, mud, iceor snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing in the Index.) the button again. The traction control system warning light should gooff.

4-10 Enhanced Traction System This warning light will (3100 or 3800 Engine) come on to let you know if TRAC there’s a problem with the Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System 1system. (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially usefulin OFF slippery road conditions.The system operates onlyif it senses that one or bothof the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system reduces engine power and mayalso upshift the See “Enhanced Traction System Warning Light”in the transaxle to limit wheel spin. Index. When this warning light is on,the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. This light will come on when your Enhanced To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road LOW Traction System is limiting conditions, you should always leave the Enhanced wheel spin. See “Enhanced Traction System on. But you canturn the systemoff if TRAC Traction System Warning you ever need to. (You should turn the system off if your Light ” in the index. vehicle ever gets stuckin sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”in the Index.)

You may feel or hear the system working,but this is normal. The Enhanced Traction System operates inall transaxle shift lever positions. Butthe system can upshift the transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve chosen, so you should use the lower gears only when necessary. See “Automatic Transaxle”in the Index. Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the systemis not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort. Variable Effort Steering (Option) This steering system provides lighter steeringeffort for parking and when driving at speeds below20 mph (32 km/h). Steering effort will increaseat higher speeds When you turn the system off, the Enhanced Traction for improved road feel. System warning lightwill come on and stay on. If the Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin when Steering Tips you press the button toturn the system off, the warning light will come on-- and the system will shut-off Driving onCurves instantly. It willwait until there’s no longera current It’s important to take curves aat reasonable speed. need to limit wheel spin. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on You can turn the system back onat any time by pressing the news happen on curves. Here’s why: the button again. The Enhanced Traction System warning light should go off. Experienced driver or beginner, eachof us is subject to the same lawsof physics when drivingon curves. The Braking in Emergencies traction of the tires against the road surface makesit With anti-lock, you cansteer and brake at the same possible for the vehicleto change its path when youturn time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep than even the very best braking. the vehicle goingin the samedirection. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. 4-12 The traction you can getin a curve depends on the Steering in Emergencies condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at There are times when steerifig be more effective which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you’re can than braking. For example, you come over a hill and in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between suddenly accelerate. Both control systems-- steering and parked cars and stops rightin front of you. You can acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet avoid these problems by braking-- if you can stop in the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. much of those places.You can lose control. Refer to That’s the timefor evasive action-- steering around “Enhanced Traction System” or “Traction Control the problem. System”in the Index. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like What should you do ifthis ever happens? Easeup on the these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you wantit Emergencies” earlier in this section.)It is better to to go, and slow down. remove as much speed asyou can from a possible Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are right depending onthe space available. based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Waitto accelerate untilyou are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. 4-13 Off-Road Recovery You may find that your rightwheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

LEFT APPROX. WARTER TURN

An emergency like this requires close attention anda edge of pamd wrfsco quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have If the levelof the shoulder is only slightly below the avoided the object. pavement, recovery shouldbe fairly easy. Easeoff the The fact that such emergency situations are always accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steer so possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You all times andwear safety belts properly. can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Thenturn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-14 Passing Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity.For one The driverof a vehicle about to pass another on a thing, following too closely reduces your areaof two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment, vision, especially if you’re following a larger accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate spaceif the back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keepback a Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane reasonable distance. highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, passing vehicle occupiesthe same lane as oncoming start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in get too close. Time your moveso you will be judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can increasing speed as the time comes to moveinto the suddenly put the passing driver face to face withthe other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, youwill have a worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision. “running start” that more than makes up thefor So here are some tipsfor passing: distance you wouldlose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to you need only slow down anddrop back again and crossroads for situations that might affect your passing wait for another opportunity. patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But takecare that someone isn’t trying to Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might Remember to glanceover your shoulder and check indicate aturn or an intersection, delay your pass. the blind spot. A broken center line usually indicates it’sall right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on yourside of the laneor a double solid line, evenif the road seems emptyof approaching traffic. 4-15 0 Check your mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and start your left lane change signal before moving out constantly seek an escape routeor area of less danger. of the right lane to pass. When you arefar enough ahead of the passed vehicleto see its frontin your Skidding inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal In a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle. and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicle you care suited to existing conditions, andby not “overdriving” just passed may seem to be farther away from you those conditions. But skids are always possible. than it really is.) The three typesof skids correspondto your vehicle’s 0 Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too next vehicle. much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and 0 Don’t overtakea slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,it may much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin. be slowing downor starting to turn. A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off 0 If you’re being passed, make it easy for the the accelerator pedal. following driver to get ahead ofyou. Perhaps you If you have the Enhanced Traction System or ‘Traction can ease a little to the right. Control System”, remember: It helps avoid only the Loss of Control acceleration skid. If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System or Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering ‘Traction Control System”,or if the systemis off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the foot off the accelerator pedal. tires meet the roadto do what the driver has asked.

4-16 If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your footoff the Driving at Night accelerator pedal and quickly steer the wayyou want the vehicle to go.If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skidif it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel or other materialis on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine brakingby shifting toa lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snowon the road to make a “mirrored surface”-- and slow down when you have any doubt. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some driversare likely to be impaired -- by Remember: Any anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, orby fatigue. avoid only the brakingskid.

4-17 Here are some tips on night driving. down on glare from headlamps, but they also makea lot Drive defensively. of things invisible. You can be temporarily blindedby approaching 0 Don’t drink and drive. headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirrorto reduce the seconds, for your eyes to readjustto the dark. Whenyou glare from headlamps behind you. are faced with severeglare (as from a driver who 0 Since you can’t see as well, you may needto doesn’t lower the high beams,or a vehicle with slow down and keep more space between you and misaimed headlamps), slow downa little. Avoid staring other vehicles. directly into the approaching headlamps. Keep your windshield and all theglass on your vehicle 0 Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. clean -- inside and out. Glareat night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even theinside of the glass 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, and rest. making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember thatyour headlamps light up far less aof Night Vision roadway when you are ina turn or curve. Keep your No one can seeas well at night asin the daytime. Butas eyes moving; that way, it’s easierto pick out dimly we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old lighted objects. Just as your headlamps shouldbe driver may require at least twice as much light to see thechecked regularly for proper aim,so should your eyes same thingat night as a 20-year-old. be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and What you do in the daytime canalso affect your night aren’t even awareof it. vision. For example, if you spend the dayin bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. Butif you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut 4-18 Driving in Rain and onWet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. Ona wet road, you can't stop, accelerateor turn as well because your tire-to-road tractionisn't as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don't have much tread left,you'll get even less traction. It's always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexesare tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harderit is to see. Even if your windshield wiper bladesare in good shape,a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, theedge of the road and even people walking. It's wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they showsigns of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

4-19 A CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won't work as well in a quick stop and may cause pullingto one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving througha large puddleof water or a car wash, apply yourbrake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving toofast through large water puddlesor even going through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.

4-20 Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happenif the roadis wet enough and you’re NOTICE: going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. If you drive too quickly through deep puddlesor standing water, water can come in through your Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. Butit can if your engine’s air intake and badly damage your tires do not have much treador if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lotof water is standing on engine. Never drive through water that is slightly the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone lower than the underbodyof your vehicle.If you poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the can’t avoid deep puddles or standingwater, drive water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. through them very slowly. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fastrule about hydroplaning. The Some Other Rainy WeatherTips best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)

4-21 City Driving Here are ways to increase your safetyin city driving: Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.(See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) 0 Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turns green,and just before you start to move, check both waysfor vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streetsis the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch forout what the other driversare doing and pay attention to trafk signals.

4-22 Freeway Driving At the entrance, thereis usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view ofthe freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge intothe gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you areon the freeway, adjust your speed theto posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. Once you are moving onthe freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move Mile for mile, freeways(also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night. expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. When you want to leavethe freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same the next exit. speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. The exit speedis usually posted. Here are some things you can check before a trip: Reduce your speed accordingto your speedometer, not 0 Windshield Washer Fluid:Is the reservoirfull? Are to your senseof motion. After drivingfor any distance all windows clean inside and outside? at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going 0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? slower than you actuallyare. 0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked Before Leaving ona Long Trip all levels? Make sure you’re ready.Try to be well rested. If you 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? must start when you’re not fresh-- such as after a day’s 0 Tires: They are vitally important toa safe, work -- don’t plan to maketoo many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor can easilydrive in. long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it 0 Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook serviced and maintained, it’s readyto go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. course, along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short Of time to avoida major storm system? you’ll find experiencedand able service expertsin Pontiac dealerships all acrossNorth America. They’ll be 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? ready and willing to help if you need it.

4-24 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. There is something aboutan easy stretchof road with the same scenery, along with the humof the tires on the road, the droneof the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First, be aware thatit can happen. Then here are some tips: Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.

Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to Driving on steep hillsor mountains is different from the sides. Check your rearviewmirrors and your driving in flator rolling terrain. instruments frequently. If you get sleepy, pulloff the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

4-25 If you drive regularly in steep country,or if you’re A planning to visit there, here are sometips that can make I /I\ CAUTION: your trips safer and more enjoyable. Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the levels and the brakes, tires, cooling system also ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to and transaxle. These parts can work hard on do all the work down. They could get mountain roads. of slowing so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then Know how to go down hills. The most important have poor braking or even none going down a hill. thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the You could crash. Always have your engine running slowing down. Shift toa lower gear whenyou go and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. down a steep or long hill.

e Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down /I\ CAUTION: to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb thehill better. If you don’t shift down, your brakescould e Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane get so hot thatthey wouldn’t work well. You roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut would then have poorbraking oreven none going across the centerof the road. Drive at speeds that let down a hill. You could crash. Shiftdown to let you stay in your own lane. your engine assist your brakeson a steep e As you go over the topof a hill, be alert. There could be downhill slope. something in your lane, likea stalled car or an accident. e You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. 4-26 Winter Driving

Include anice scraper, a small brushor broom, a supply of windshield washerfluid, a rag, some winter outer Here are some tips for winter driving: clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will Have your vehicle in good shapefor winter. be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag You may want to put winter emergency supplies in of sand, a pieceof old carpetor a coupleof burlap bags your trunk. to help provide traction.Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-27 Driving on Snow or Ice What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hardto drive on. But wet Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the ice can be even more trouble because it mayoffer the road probably have good traction. least traction of all. You can get wetice when it’s about However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall. the road, you can have a very slippery situation.You’ll Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews have a lot less tractionor “grip” and will needto be can get there. very careful. Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution. If you have the Enhanced Traction System or “Traction Control System”, keep thesystem on. It will improve your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has this system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See “Enhanced Traction System” or ‘Traction Control System”in the Index. If you don’t have the Enhanced Traction System or “‘Traction Control System”,accelerate gently.Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

4-28 Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability If You’re Caught in a Blizzard when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road,ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildingsor under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curveor an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch ofice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you are near help and you can hike throughthe snow. Here are some things to do tosummon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-29 Tie a red cloth to your vehicle toalert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.

0 Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothingto keep warm. to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill you. You can’t see it orsmell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around the baseof your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from timeto time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there. Open a window just a little on the sideof the vehicle that’s away fromthe wind. This will help keep CO out.

You can run the engineto keep warm, but be careful.

4-30 Run your engine onlyas long as you must. This saves Loading Your Vehicle fuel. When you run the engine, makeit go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuelfor the heat that you get and it keeps the TIRE - LOADINGINFORMATION A battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to OCCUPANTS restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heaterrun for a while. MAX. LOADING @ GVWR SAME Then, shut the engineoff and close the window almost r all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable 1 from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible. Preserve the 1 'U fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get IT, ADD 28KPA(4LBS) out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises Manual for tire pressureneeded at himlH(100 mph) or higher speeds, where legal, every half houror so until help comes. krnrlrlitinnal tira inlnrmo+inn

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weightit may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label is on the inside of the trunk lid. The label tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information about the numberof people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight you can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weightof all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. 4-31 MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP GVWR GAWR FRT I4r I -- Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could causeyou to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.

The other labelis the Certification label, foundon the NOTICE: rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross I I weight capacityof your vehicle, called theGVWR Your warranty does not coverparts or (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).The GVWR includes the components that fail becauseof overloading. weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the GVWRfor your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either thefront or rear axle. If you do have a heavy load, spread it out. Don’tcarry more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.

4-32 If you put things inside your vehicle-- like suitcases, Towing a Trailer tools, packages or anything else-- they will go asfast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

I If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike trailer. For example, if the traileris too heavy, the and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn,or in brakes may not workwell -- or even at all. You a crash. and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting Put things in the trunkof your vehicle. In a repairs would not be covered by your warranty. trunk, put themas far forward as you can. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the ’Iky to spread theweight evenly. steps inthis section. Ask your dealer foradvice Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, and information about towinga trailer with inside the vehicle so that some of them are your vehicle. above the tops of the seats. Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. Do not tow a trailerif your vehicle is equipped with When you carry something inside the 3800 (L67) supercharged engine. vehicle, secure it whenever you can. Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the L proper trailer towing equipment.To identify what the vehicle trailering capacityis for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weightof the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But traileringis different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changesin handling, durability and 0 Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct dealer about sway controls. equipment, and it has to be used properly. 0 Don’t tow a trailer at all during thefirst 1 ,OOO miles That’s the reasonfor this part.In it are many (1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, time-tested, important trailering tips andsafety rules. axle or other parts could be damaged. Many of these are important for your safety and thatof 0 Then, during thefirst 500 miles (800 km) that you your passengers. So please readthis section carefully tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and before you pulla trailer. don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, engine and otherparts of your vehicle wearin at the wheel assemblies andtires are forced towork harder heavier loads. against the dragof the added weight. The engineis a Obey speed limit restrictions when towinga trailer. required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under Don’t drive fasterthan the maximum posted speed greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the for trailers (or no morethan 55 mph (90 km/h)) to trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing save wear on your vehicle’s parts. the pulling requirements. Three important considerations haveto do with weight: If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer the weight of the trailer, If you do, here are some important points: 0 the weight of the trailer tongue 0 There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to dowith trailering. Make sure 0 and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires. your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

4-34 Weight of the Trailer cargo you may carry init, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you How heavy can a trailer safely be? must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your It should never weigh more than1,000 lbs. But even that vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading can be too heavy. Your Vehicle” in the Indexfor more information about It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pull a trailer are all important. And,it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. You can ask yourdealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at: Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center P. 0. Box 436008 Pontiac, MI 48343-6008 In Canada, write to: General Motorsof Canada Limited A B Customer Communication Centre 1908 ColonelSam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded weight to measure because it affects the total or trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing grossweight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weighthitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 12 percent of (GVW) includes the curb weightof the vehicle, any the total loaded trailer weight(B).

4-35 After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and Will you have to make any holesin the body of your then the tongue, separately,to see if the weights are vehicle when youinstall a trailer hitch?If you do, proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right then be sureto seal the holes later when you remove simply by moving some items around in the trailer. the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can getinto your Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide”in the Index). Dirt Be sureyour vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper and water can, too. limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Tire-Loading Information label, found on the inside Safety Chains of the trunk lid, or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the You should always attach chains between your vehicle Index. Then besure you don’t go over theGVW and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the of the trailerso that the tongue will notdrop to the road trailer tongue. if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains maybe provided by the hitch Hitches manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are chains and do not attach themto the bumper. Always a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. some rules to follow: And, never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground. 0 Your vehicle may have nonmetallic, composite bumpers. The bumpers onyour vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitchesor other bumper-type hitchesto them. Use onlya frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

4-36 Trailer Brakes Following Distance Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not trytap to into Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle aheadas you your vehicle’s brake system.If you do, both brake would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This systems won’t work well,or at all. can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires certaina amount of experience. Passing Before settingout for the open road, you’ll want getto You’ll need more passing distanceup ahead when to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal handling and braking withthe added weightof the longer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the trailer. And always keep in mind thatthe vehicle you are passed vehicle before youcan return to your lane. driving is now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as your vehicleis by itself. Backing Up Before you start, check thetrailer hitch and platform Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand. (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, Then, to move the trailerto the left,just move that hand lamps, tires andmirror adjustment. If the trailer has to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,if then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surepossible, have someoneguide you. the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure thatthe load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.

4-37 Making lhms Thrn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check NOTICE: with your Pontiac dealer. The green arrowson your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn Making very sharp turns while trailering could or lane change. Properly hookedup, the trailer lamps cause the trailerto come in contact with the will also flash, telling other drivers you’re aboutturn, to vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid change lanesor stop. making very sharp turns while trailering. When towing a trailer, the greenmows on your instrument panel will flashfor turns even if the bulbs on When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. important to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well bulbs are still working. in advance. Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a trailer lighting system intoyour vehicle’s lighting system, its bulb warning lights may not let youknow if one of your lamps goes out.So, when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in, be sureto check your vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they’re all working. Once you disconnect the trailer lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out.

4-38 Driving On Grades Parking on Hills Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig down, you might have to use your brakesso much that could start to move. People can be injured, and both they would gethot and no longer work well. your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s speed to around45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the how to do it: possibility of engine and transaxle overheating. 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’tshift into If you have overdrive, you may want to drive in PARK (P) yet. THIRD (3), instead of DRIVE (D). 2. Have someone place chocks underthe trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift toPARK (P). 5. Release the regular brakes.

4-39 When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing Parking ona Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer.See the Maintenance Schedulefor more while you: on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), 0 Start your engine; engine oil, drive belts, cooling system and brake 0 Shift into a gear; and adjustment. Eachof these is covered in this manual, and the Index will helpyou find them quickly. If you’re 0 Release the parking brake. trailering, it’s a good idea to reviewthis information 2. Let up on the brake pedal. before you start your trip. 3. Drive slowly until the traileris clear of the chocks. Check periodically tosee that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks. Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions.See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

4-40 b NOTES b NOTES Section 5 Problemson the Road Vf

- , I . . ~~ ~~ ., . - .~ . - .. 1,F. - 1'7. -A,,. ,-, .. 5' _I ,_. . . .-+ .. .- , ~ ... .= ,. . -.

Here you'll find what to do about some problems that can occuron the road.

5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 -26 If A Tire Goes Flat 5-2 Other Warning Devices 5-27 Changing a Flat Tire 5-3 Jump Starting 5-37 Compact Spare Tire 5-8 Towing Your Vehicle 5-38 If You're Stuck: In Sand, Mud, 5-15 Engine Overheating Ice or Snow

5-1 Hazard Warning Flashers Press the switch on top of the steering columnto make your fiont and rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position yourkey is in, and even if the key isn't in.

To turn off the flashers, pressthe switch again. When the hazard warning flashersare on, your turn signals and brake lamps won't work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at Your hazard warning flashers let youwarn others. They the side of the road about300 feet (100 m) behind also let police know you have a problem. Your front and your vehicle. rear turn signal lamps will flashon and off.

5-2 Jump Starting NOTICE: If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle. But please follow the steps listed to it do safely. Ignoring these steps could resultcostly in damage to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Trying tostart your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage yourvehicle. Batteries can hurtyou. They can be dangerous because: 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt They contain acid that can burnyou. battery with a negative ground system. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite. They contain enough electricity to burn you. NOTICE: If you don’t follow these stepsexactly, some or all If the othersystem isn’t a 12-volt system with a of these things can hurtyou. negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. 2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach, but be surethe vehicles aren’t touching CAU-ION: each other. If they are, it could cause a ground ’ /1\ connection you don’t want. You wouldn’tbe able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could An electric fan canstart up even when the engine damage the electrical systems. is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL (N). electric fan. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed, and radios.This will avoid 4. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could each battery. Your vehicle has a remote positive(+) save your radio! jump starting terminal.The terminal is on the same side of the engine compartmentas your battery. You should always use the remote positive(+) terminal I NOTICE: instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery.

~ If you leave your radio on,it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by ryour warranty.

5-4 A CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery hasenough water. You don’t need to add water to theACDelco Freedom@ battery installed in everynew GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, besure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could To uncover the remote positive(+) terminal, lift the be present. plastic cap. Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and get medical helpimmediately.

5-5 5. Check that thejumper cables don’thave loose or I missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. CAUTION: The vehicles could be damaged, too. 4 Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts 1 once the engineis running.

Before you connect the cables, hereare some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal enginepart. Don’t connect positive(+) to negative (-), or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe otherparts, too. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Don't let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive(+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if ihe vehiclehas one.

1 8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery's 9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away negative (-) terminal. from the dead battery, butnot near engine parts that Don't let the other end move. The electrical connection is just as good touch anything until the there, but the chanceof sparks getting back to the next step. The other end battery is much less. of the negative (-) cable 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery andrun doesn 'Zgo to the the engine for a while. dead battery. I 11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won't start after afew tries, it probably needs service. It goes toa heavy, unpainted, metal part on the engineof the vehicle with the dead battery. 5-7 12. Remove the cablesin reverse orderto prevent Towing Your Vehicle electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal. Try to have aGM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle.See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. If your vehicle has been changedor modified since it was factory-new by adding aftermarketitems like fog lamps, aero skirting,or special tires and wheels, these instructions and illustrations may not becorrect. Before you do anything, turn onthe hazard warning flashers. nlo I When you call, tell the towing service:

0 That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front with sling-type equipment.

0 That your vehicle has front-wheel drive. The make, model and year of your vehicle. A. Heavy Metal Engine Part 0 Whether you can still move the shift lever. B. Good Battery 0 If there was an accident, what was damaged. C. Dead Battery

5-8 When the towing service arrives, letthe tow operator know that this manual contains detailed towing CAUTION: instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to A see them. To help avoidinjury toyou or others: Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never tow faster thansafe or posted speeds. Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck. Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towingit. Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.

5-9 When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition CAUTION: turned to the OFF position. The steering wheel should A be clamped in a straight-ahead position, witha clamping device designed for towing service.Do not use the A vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn’t vehicle’s steering column lockfor this. The transaxle adequately secured. Thiscan cause a collision, should bein PARK (P) and the parking serious personalinjury and vehicle damage. The brake released. vehicle should be tightly secured with chainsor Don’t haveyour vehicle towed on the front wheels, steel cables beforeit is transported. unless you must. If the vehicle must be towedon the Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, front wheels, be sureto follow the speed anddistance canvas webbing, etc.)that can becut by sharp restrictions laterin this section or your transaxle will be edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, thenthe T-hooks inserted inthe T-hook slots. Never use front wheels haveto be supported on a dolly. J-hooks. They will damagedrivetrain and suspension components.

5-10 Front Towing -1 These slots are to be used

I NOTICE: When attaching T-hooks to the shippingslots in the frame rail, attach them inside of the frame to avoid damage to the frameor front fascia.

5-11 I NOTICE: Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor fascidfog lamp damagewill occur. Use wheel-lift or carcarrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required forcarcarrier equipment. Use safety chains andwheel straps. Towing a vehicle over rough surfacescould damage avehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, raise thevehicle until adequate clearance is obtainedbetween the ground and/orwheel-lift equipment. Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to suspension componentswhen using carcarrier Attach a separate safety chain aroundthe outboard end equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the of each lower controlarm. T-hook slots. NOTICE:

I Take care notto damage speed sensorwires or brake hoses when attaching chains andT-hooks.

5-12 Rear Towing Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 k&), 500 miles (800km) I NOTICE: If the vehicle must betowed on the frontwheels, it cannot betowed more thana total of 500 miles (800 km) for thelifetime of the vehicle.

NOTICE:

Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor the rear bumper fascia will be damaged. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, installa towing dolly and raise thevehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/or Use wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional wheel-lift equipment. ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps. For rear towing, Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to the parking brakes must be applied. suspension componentswhen using carcarrier equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the T-hook slots.

5-13 Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of both lateral arms.

NOTICE:

Attach T-hook chainsto the T-hook slots in the Please take care not to damage speed sensor floor pan support rails,just ahead of the rear wheels, wires or brake hoses when attaching chains on both sides. and T-hooks. These slots are to be used when loading and securing to cm-carrier equipment.

5-14 Engine Overheating NOTICE: You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning light about a hot engine on your instrument panel.See “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and “Engine After driving in the overheated engine protection Coolant Temperature Warning Light”in the Index.You operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow also have a low coolant light on your instrument panel. the engineto cool before attemptingany repair. See “Low Coolant Light” in the Index. The engineoil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating “Engine Oil, When to Change” in the Index. Mode (3100 Engine Only) Should an overheated engine condition exist,an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of three cylinders helps prevent engine damage. this In mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance. The low coolant light may comeon and the temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition exists. This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be drivento a safe place inan emergency. Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode shouldbe avoided.

5-15 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION:- Steam froman overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant beforeyou open thehood. If you keep drivingwhen your engine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catchfire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engineif it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

5-16 2. Turn on your heater to full hot atthe highest fan NOTICE: speed and open the window as necessary. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL(N); If your engine catches fire because you keep otherwise, shift tothe highest gear while driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (03) badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be or DRIVE (D). covered by your warranty.If your vehicle has the If you no longer have the overheat warning,you 3100 engine, see “Overheated Engine Protection can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about Operating Mode” in the Index. 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally. If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngine If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away. If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes If there’s stillno sign of steam, you can idle the engine the engine canget a littletoo hot when you: for two or three minutes while you’re parked, tosee if the warning stops. But then, if youstill have the Climb a long hill on a hot day. warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of Stop after high-speed driving. the vehicle until it cools down.If your vehicle has the 3 100 engine, see “Overheated Engine Protection Idle for long periods in traffic. Operating Mode” listed previously in this section. Tow a trailer. You may decide not tolift the hood but to get service If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, help right away. try this for a minute orso: 1. Turn off your air conditioner.

5-17 Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:

3800 and 3800 Supercharged Engine

A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans 3100 Engine C. Radiator Pressure Cap

5-18 ’ A CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else untilit cools down.

The coolant level should beat or above the COLD mark on the overflow hosein the coolant recovery tank.To check the coolant level, remove thecap on the coolant recovery tank. Check to make sure that the coolant level is up to the COLD fill level on the hose attachedto the cap. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

5-19 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant I A CAUTION: Recovery Tank I If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolantlevel Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine isn’t at theCOLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean parts, canbe very hot. Don’t touch them. If you wuter (preferably distilled) andDEX-COOL@ engine do, you can be burned. coolant at the coolant recovery tank.(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.) Don’t run the engineif there is a leak. If you run the engine, it couldlose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leakfined before you drive thevehicle. Adding only plain water to yourcooling system can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other NOTICE: liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant Engine damage if you keep running your engine warning systemis set for the propercoolant without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty. mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t Mode” in theIndex. get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and If there seems to be no leak, with the engineon, check to see if the electric engine coolingfans are running. If the DEX-COOL@coolant. engine is overheating,both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

5-20 I NOTICE:

In cold weather, water canfreeze and crack the You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol Use the recommended coolantand the proper and itwill burn if the engineparts arehot coolant mixture. enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolantin the coolant recovery tankis at the COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure thecooling system is cool before you doit.

5-21 Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- they can comeout at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the cooling system, includingthe radiator pressure cap, is hot. Waitfor the cooling systemand radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

NOTICE:

Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheatand be severely damaged.

5-22 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the 2. Then keep turning the pressurecap, but now push cooling system, including the radiator pressurecap down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. and upper radiator hose,is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise untilit fist stops. (Don't pressdown while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop.A hiss means You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot there is still some pressure left. engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engineparts are hot enough. Don't spill coolant ona hot engine.

5-23 I" 3

3. After the engine cools, open the coolantair bleed valve or valves. C 3100 V6 (VIN Code M): There are two bleed valves. One is located on the thermostat housing.The other 4. Fill the radiator with the properDEX-COOL@ is locatedon the thermostat bypass tube. coolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. 3800 V6 Supercharged engine (VIN Code 1): (See "Engine Coolant" in the Indexfor more There is one bleed valve. It is located on the information about the proper coolant mixture.) thermostat housing. If you see a streamof coolant comingfrom an air bleed valve, closethe valve. Otherwise, close the valves after the radiatoris filled. 5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment.

5-24 ‘f

6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the 8. Start the engine andlet it run until you canfeel the FULL mark. upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the 7. Put the cap backon the coolant recovery tank, but engine cooling fans. leave the radiator pressure capoff. 9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

5-25 If a Tire Goes Flat It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” hereare a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tirefails, the flat tire will create adrag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedaland grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently braketo a stop well out of the tr&k lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve,acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d usein a 10. Then replace the pressure cap. Atany time during skid. In any rear blowout, remove yourfoot from the this procedure if coolant begins to flow outof the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the steering theway you want the vehicle togo. It may be arrows on the pressure cap line up likethis. very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop-- well off the roadif possible. 11. Check the coolant inthe recovery tank. The level in the coolant recovery tank should be at HOTthe If a tire goesflat, the next part shows howto use your mark when the engineis hot or at the COLD mark jacking equipment to change aflat tire safely. when the engineis cold.

5-26 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place.Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

Changing a tire can causean injury. Thevehicle can slipoff the jack androll overyou or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent thevehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brakefirmly. 2. Put the shiftlever in PARK (P). 3. Turn off the engine. The following stepswill tell you how to use the jack and To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move, change a tire. you can put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthestaway fromthe one being changed. That would be the tire on the other sideof the vehicle, at the opposite end.

5-27 Removing the Spare Tire andTools The equipment you'll need

.. Pull the carpeting from the floor of thetrunk. Then lift and remove the cover. Remove the spare tire.

5-28 C

Turn the nut holding thejack to the left and removeit. The tools you’ll be using include thejack (A) extension Then remove the jackand wrench. and protectodguide (B) and wheel wrench (C).

5-29 If there is a wheel cover, Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the loosen the plastic nut caps Spare Tire with the wheel wrench. They won’t come off. Then, using the flat endof the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the cover untilit comes off. Be careful; the edges may be sharp. Don’t try to remove the cover with your bare hands.

If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, remove them using the wheel wrench.

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove them yet. 2. Turn the jack handle to the rightto raise thejack lift head a few inches.

5-30 FRONT VEHICLE

LIFT HEAD

FRONT EDGE OF / ‘/ REAR WHEEL REAR EDGE OF FRONT OPENING -WHEEL OPENING

For jacking atthe vehicle’s front location, putjack lift For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, putjack the lift about 6 inches ( 15 cm) from the rear edge of the front head about 5.5 inches (14 cm) from the front edgeof the wheel opening or between the two boltsas shown. rear wheel opening orjust behind the off-set as shown. Put the compact spare tire near you.

5-31 A CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked upis dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badlyinjured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it is supportedonly by a jack. - A CAUTION: Raising yourvehicle with thejack improperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury andvehicle damage, besure to fit the jack 3. Raise the vehicleby turning the jack handle to the lift head into theproper location before raising right. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the ground for the vehicle. the spare tire to fit under the vehicle. Remove all wheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.

5-32 4. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheelbolts, -1 mounting surfaces and .h CAUTION: spare wheel. Never use oil or grease onstuds or nuts. If you do, the nuts mightcome loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

5. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded endof the nuts toward the CAUTION: I wheel.Tighten each nut A by hand until the wheel is held against thehub. Rust or dirt on thewheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from placesthe where thewheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rustor dirt off.

5-33 7. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose 6. Lower the vehicleby turning the jack handle to the left. Lower thejack completely. and even come off. This could leadto anaccident. Be sure to use thecorrect wheel nuts. If you have to replace them,be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhereas soon as you can andhave the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 Nom.)

5-34 Storing the Flat Tire andTools NOTICE:

Improperly tightenedwheel nuts canlead to CAUTION: brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid A expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the nuts in the propersequence and to the proper passenger compartmentof the vehicle could torque specification. cause iqjury.In a sudden stopor collision, loose equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these Don’t try to put the wheel cover on your compact in the properplace. spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. After you’ve put the compact sparetire on your vehicle, you’ll need to store theflat tire in your trunk. Use the I NOTICE: following procedure tosecure the flat tirein the trunk. Wheel covers won’t fit on yourcompact spare.If you try to puta wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage thecover or the spare.

5-35 Storing the Spare Tireand Tools

I A CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire or other equipmentin the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

The compact spareis for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire witha full-size tire as soon as you When storing a full-size tire, you must use the extension can. See “Compact Spare Tire”in the Index. See the to help avoid wheel surface damage. Usethe extension storage instructions labelto replace your compact spare and protectodguide locatedin foam holder. To store a in your trunk properly. full-size tire, place the tire valve stem facing down, with protector/guide through a wheel bolt hole, removethe protector and attach the retainer securely. When reinstalling the compact spare, put the protectodguide back in the foam holder. Store the coverfar as forward as possible.

5-36 1. Retainer Compact Spare Tire 2. Cover Although the compactspare tire was fully inflatedwhen 3.Retainer your vehicle was new,it can lose airafter a time. (Full Size Spare) Check the inflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 60 psi (420 Pa). 4. Tire After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, 5. Nut you should stop as soon as possible and make 6. Jack sure your sparetire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph 7. Wrench (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), 8. Lock Nut Tool so you can finish your trip and have your full-sizetire 9. Foam repaired or replaced where you want.Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soonas you 10. Bolt Screw can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in 11. Nut Extension and case you need it again. Protector/Guide I I NOTICE:

When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other partsof your vehicle.

5-37 Don’t use your compact spare on othervehicles. If You’re Stuck: In Sand,Mud, And don’t mix your compact sparetire or wheel with Ice or Snow other wheels or tires. Theywon’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together. What you don’t want todo when your vehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’restuck, but )NOTICE: you must use caution.

Tire chainswon’t fit your compact spare.Using them can damageyour vehicle and can damage I CAUTION: the chains too. Don’t usetire chains on your A compact spare. If you let your tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transaxle or other partsof the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin thewheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

5-38 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out NOTICE: First, turn your steering wheel leftand right. That will I clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back Spinning your wheels can destroy partsof your and forth between REVERSE (R) and FIRST(1) or vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels SECOND (2), spinning the wheels as littleas possible. too fast while shifting your transaxle back and The enhanced traction system willturn off when the forth, you can destroy your transaxle. shift lever isin FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) gear. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxleis in gear. If For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need see “Tire Chains” in the Index. to be towed out.If you do need to be towedout, see “Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index. fi NOTES

5-40 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the careof your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. Thereis also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2 Service 6-44 Tires 6-3 Fuel 6-52 Appearance Care 6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6-53 Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle 6-6 Filling Your Tank 6-55 Care of the Safety Belts and Built-in Child 6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Restraint Harness 6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6-56 Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle 6- 13 Engine Oil 6-57 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels(If Equipped) 6-20 Air Cleaner 6-59 Underbody Maintenance 6-22 Automatic Transaxle Fluid . 6-60 Appearance Care Materials Chart 6-26 Engine Coolant 6-6 1 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6-32 Windshield Washer Fluid 6-6 1 Service Parts Identification Label 6-33 Brakes 6-62 Electrical System 6-36 Battery 6-68 Capacities and Specifications 6-37 Bulb Replacement 6-70 Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts 6-44 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6-70 Air Conditioning Refrigerants Service Doing Your Own Service Work Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll be happy withit. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for want to usethe proper Pontiac Service Manual. It tells all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and you much more about howto service yourvehicle than GM-trained and supported service people. this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications”in the Index. We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your vehicle has anair bag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see “ServicingYour Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” inthe Index. 1 EJ You should keep a record with allparts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service workyou Genuine perform. See “Maintenance Record”in the Index.

6-2 Adding Equipment to the A CAUTION: Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add tothe outside of your vehicle can You can be injured and yourvehicle c!!!d be affect the airflow aroundit. This may cause wind noise damaged if you try to doservice work ona and affect windshield washer performance. Check with vehicle without knowing enoughabout it. your dealer before adding equipmentto the outsideof your vehicle. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, the properreplacement parts Fuel and tools before you attempt anyvehicle The 8th digitof your vehicle identification number maintenance task. (VIN) showsthe code letter for your engine. You will Be sure touse the proper nuts, bolts and find the VINat the top left of your instrument panel. other fasteners. “English”and “metric” (See “Vehicle Identification Number”in the Index.) fasteners can beeasily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners,parts can later break If you have the 3100 engine (VIN Code M) or 3800 engine (VIN CodeK), use regular unleaded gasoline or fall off. You could behurt. rated at 87 octane or higher. If you’re usingfuel rated at the recommended octaneor higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worryif you hear alittle pinging noise when you’re accelerating or drivingup a hill. That’snormal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octanefuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knockthat means you have a problem.

6-3 If you have the 3800 Supercharged engine(VIN If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Code l), use premium unleaded gasoline rated at Standards (indicated on the underhood emissioncontrol 91 octane or higher. With the 3800 Supercharged label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet engine, inan emergency, you may be able to usea California specifications.If such fuels are not available lower octane -- as low as87 -- if heavy knocking in states adopting California emissions standards, your does not occur. If you are using91 or higher octane vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting unleaded gasoline and you hear heavy knocking, your federal specifications, but emission control system engine needs service. performance may beaffected. The malfunction indicator At a minimum, the gasoline youuse should meet lamp on your instrument panel may turn andor on specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test.If this occurs, CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline return to your authorized Pontiac dealerfor diagnosis specifications have been developed by the American to determine the causeof failure. In the event it is Automobile Manufacturers Association(AAMA) for determined that the causeof the conditionis the type of better vehicle performance and engine protection. fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. Gasolines meetingthe AAMA specification could Some gasolines that are not reformulatedfor low provide improved driveability and emission control emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called system protection compared to other gasolines. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); Be sure the posted octanefor premium is at least 91 ask your service station operator whetheror not his fuel (at least 89 for middle grade and87 for regular). If the contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the octane is less than87, you may get a heavy knocking use of such gasolines.If fuels containingMMT are used, noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough,it can damage spark pluglife may be reduced and your emission your engine. control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lampon your instrument panel may turn on. Ifthis occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service.

6-4 To provide cleaner air, all gasolines inthe United States Fuels in Foreign Countries are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel If you plan on driving in another country outsidethe system, allowing your emission control system to United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to function properly. Therefore, you should not haveto add find. Never use leaded gasolineor any other fuel not anythmg to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and caused by useof improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to your warranty. help clean theair. General Motors recommends that you To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or use these gasolines if they comply with the contact a major oil company that does businessthe in specifications described earlier. country where you’ll be driving. You can also write us at the following addressfor NOTICE: advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode 1908 Colonel Sam Drive metal partsin your fuel system andalso damage Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.

6-5 Filling Your Tank The capis behind the fuel dooron the left sideof your vehicle.

While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the pin 1 A CAUTION: on the fuel door. To remove the cap,turn it slowly to the left Gasoline vaporis highly flammable. It burns (counterclockwise). The caphas a spring in it; ifyou let violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. go of the cap too soon, it will spring backto the right. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasolineor refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames andsmoking materials awayfrom gasoline.

6-6 When you put the cap back on, turnit clockwise until CAUTION: you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install A I the cap. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.This would If you get gasoline on yourself and then allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See something ignites it,you could be badly burned. “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. Gasoline can spray out onyou if you open the . fuel fillercap too quickly. This spraycan happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in NOTICE: hot weather. Open the fuel filler capslowly and wait for any‘‘hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew If you need a new cap, besure toget the right the capall the way. type. Your dealer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicatorlamp tolight Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from and your fuel tank and emissions system may painted surfaces as soon as possible.See “Cleaning the be damaged.See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index. in theIndex.

6-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION: A CAUTION: I Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in An electric fan under thehood can start up and your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the injure you even whenthe engineis not running. container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any be badly burned and yourvehicle damaged if this underhood electricfan. occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others: Dispense gasoline onlyinto approved containers. 0 Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground. Things that burn canget on hot engine parts and 0 Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the start a fire. These include liquids likegasoline, 1 inside of the fill opening before operating 1 oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and i the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained other fluids, and plasticor rubber. You or others 1 untilthe filling is complete. could be burned.Be careful not todrop orspill ~ 0 Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline. things that will burn ontoa hot engine.

6-8 Hood Release I To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle. It is located at the lower left sideof the vehicle, near the parking brake.

6-9 When you open the hood of the 3100 engine, you'll see:

A. Windshield Washer Fluid D. Power Steering G. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick B. Battery Fluid Reservoir H. Brake Fluid Reservoir C. Radiator Fill Cap E. Engine Oil Fill Cap I. Engine Coolant Reservoir E Engine Oil Dipstick J. Air Cleaner 6-10 When you open the hoodof the 3800 engine, you’ll see:

A. Windshield Washer Fluid D. Power Steering G. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick B. Battery Fluid Reservoir H. Brake Fluid Reservoir C. Radiator Fill Cap E. Engine Oil Dipstick I. Engine Coolant Reservoir F. Engine Oil Fill Cap J. AirCleaner 6-12 Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are Engine Oil on properly. Thenjust pull the hood down and close it fiiy. If the LOW OIL LEVEL light on the instrument 3800 Supercharged Engine LOW OIL panel comes on,it means (If Equipped) you need to check your LEVEL engine oil level right away. Your vehicle may havea 3800 Supercharged engine. The supercharger is a device which is designed to pump more air intothe engine thanit would normally use. This air, mixed with fuel, creates increased engine For more information,see “Low Oil Level Light” inthe power. Since the supercharger is a pump and is driven Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly; from an engine accessory drive belt, increased pressure this is an added reminder. is available atall driving conditions. It’s a goodidea to check your engineoil every time you The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) works with a get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure be warm andthe vehicle must be onlevel ground. required during specific driving conditions. When this increased pressure or boost is not desired, such as during The engine oil dipstick idling and light throttle cruising, the excess air that the handle is the yellow loop supercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass. near the front of the engine. All of these controls working together provide high performance character and fuel efficiencyin the 3800 Supercharged engine.

6-13 I 3 Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstickand clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Removeit again, 1 keeping the tipdown, and check the level. I

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine Turn off the engine and give theoil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you don’t, the oil dipstick 3100 Engine might not show the actual level.

6-14 I NOTICE: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatched area thatshows the proper operating range, your enginecould be damaged.

3800 Engine When to Add Engine Oil If the oilis at or below the upper mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must usethe right kind. This part explains what kindof oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacitiesand Specifications” 3100 Engine in the Index.

6-15 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identifiedby looking for the "Starburst" symbol. This symbol indicates that theoil has been certified bythe American Petroleum Institute (API).Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol. If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has theStarburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, ;"vi be sure theoil put into 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine .f your engineis American Petroleum Institute certifield Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in for gasoline engines. the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you're through. You should also use the proper viscosity oilfor your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-16 As shown in the chart,if you have the 3100 engine, I RECOMMENDED SAEVISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VlSCOSlTT GRADEOIL FOR THEEXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. can use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s goingto be 0°F (-18°C) or I above. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. HOT WEATHER SYMBOL \ ---

I SAE 3w-30 PREFERRED

COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

3100 Engine 6-17 As shown in the chart, if you havethe 3800 engine, RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE EWGIWE OILS SAE 1OW-30 is bestfor your vehicle. However, you FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTINO, SELECT THE LOWEST SA€ UlSCOSlll 6MDE OIL FOR THE EXPECTLD TEMPERATURE WE. can use SAE 5W-30if it’s going to be colderthan 60°F (16°C) before your nextoil change. When it’s very cold, you should useSAE 5W-30.These numbers ImK on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do HOT FOR THIS not use other viscosity oils, suchas SAE 2OW-50. WEATHER -- NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

ilUElbw-30

PREFERRED &ow 0°F GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for I(-1SoC) your vehicle. If you are inan area wherethe temperature falls COLD below -20°F (-29”C),consider using either an WEATHER SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil oran SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection DO NOT USE SAE 20W-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED for your engine at extremely low temperatures.

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 6-18 Engine Oil Additives How to Reset theCHANGE OIL SOON Light Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to To reset your CHANGE OIL SOON light after an oil advise if you think something shouldbe added. change, turn the key to ON, without the engine running and pump the accelerator three times within five When to Change Engine Oil seconds. Your vehicle has an OilLife Monitor. This feature What to Do with Used Oil will let you know when to change your oil and filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change. elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could Under severe conditions, the indicator may comeon even cause cancer? Don’tlet used oil stay on your skin before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlythrow (whichever occursfirst) without an oil change. away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use anddisposal The system won’t detectdust in the oil. So, if you of oil products.) drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to reset Used oil can be a real threat tothe environment. If you the Oil Life Monitor whenthe oil has been changed. For change your own oil, besure to drainall free-flowing oil more information, see “CHANGE OIL SOON Light” in from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil the Index. by putting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, into sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used Ifoil. you have a problem properly disposingof your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.

6-19 Air Cleaner To check or replace theair cleaner filter: I A CAUTION: 1. Loosen the wing nut on Operating the enginewith the air cleaner off can the air duct. cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner 2. Lift up on thetwo clips not only cleans the air, it stops flameif the engine located on top of the backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine filter cover. backfires, you could be burned. Don’tdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner off.

I NOTICE: 3. Disconnect the duct and repositionit while removing the side cover. If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can causea damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get 4. Pull out the filter. Be sure to install theair filter and into your engine, which will damage it. Always install the cover tightly when you are finished. have theair cleaner in place when you’re driving. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento replace the air filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

6-20 Supercharger Oil Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper A CAUTION: tools, you should let your dealer or a qualified service center perform this maintenance. If you remove the supercharger oilfill plug while the engine is hot, pressure may cause hotoil to When to Check blow out of the oil fill hole.You may be burned. Check oil level every30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every Do not remove the plug until the enginecools. 36 months, whichever occurs first. What Kind of Oil to Use 1. Clean the area aroundthe oil fill plug before See “Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the Index removing it. and use onlythe recommended oil, 2. Remove the oil fill plug using a 3/16 inch Allen wrench. How to Check and Add Oil 3. The oil level is correct when it just reaches the Check oil only when the engineis cold. Allow the bottom of the threads of the inspection hole. engine to cool two threeto hours after running. 4. Replace the oil plug with the O-ring in place. Torque to 88 lb-in (10 N-m).

6-21 Automatic Transaxle Fluid How to Check to Because this operation can bea little difficult,you may When Check and Change choose to havethis done at your Pontiac dealership A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid Service Department. level is when the engine oil is changed. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles instructions here, or you could get false a reading on (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under oneor the dipstick. more of these conditions: 0 In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature NOTICE: regularly reaches90” F (32 O C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. Too much ortoo little fluid can damage your 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall hot on engine parts 0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these get an accurate reading if you check your conditions, the fluid and filterdo not require changing. transaxle fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

6-22 Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle Checking the Fluid Level fluid level if you have been driving: Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the 0 When outside temperatures are above90°F (32"C). engine running. 0 At high speed for quite a while. With the parking brake applied, place theshift lever In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. in PARK (P). While pulling a trailer. With your foot on the brake pedal, movethe shift lever through eachgear range, pausingfor about To get the right reading,the fluid should be at normal three seconds in each range. Then, position shiftthe operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C lever in PARK (P). to 93 " C). Let the engine run atidle for three to five minutes. Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above50°F (10°C). If it's colder than50°F ( 10°C), you may have to drive longer.

6-23 Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:

3100 Engine 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 1. The transaxle fluid dipstick handleis the red loop near the back of the engine. Pullout the dipstick and wipe it with a clean ragor paper towel.

6-24 2. Push it back in all the way, wait threeseconds and then pullit back out again.

3100 Engine

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluidlevel must be in the cross-hatched area. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick backin all the way.

6-25 How to Add Fluid 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check” earlierin this section. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use.See “Recommended 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained,push the Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index. dipstick backin all the way. If the fluid level is low, add only enoughof the proper Engine Coolant fluid to bring the level intothe cross-hatched area on the dipstick. The cooling s stem in your vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant is designed 1. Pull out the dipstick. to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluidat the (240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only dipstick hole to bring toit the proper level. DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant. It doesn’t take muchfluid, generally less than one The following explains your cooling systemand how to pint (0.5 L). Don’t ovefill. add coolant whenit is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your radiator, see “Engine Overheating”in the Index. LOTICE: A 50/50 mixture of water andDEX-COOL’ coolant will: We recommend you use onlyfluid labeled 0 Give freezing protection down to-34°F (-37°C). DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that labelis made especiallyfor your automatic transaxle. Give boiling protection upto 265 OF(129°C). Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-III e Protect against rust and corrosion. is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. e Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

6-26 What to Use NOTICE: Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-halfDEX-COOL’ coolant which When addingcoolant, it is important thatyou won’t damage aluminumparts. If you use this mixture, use only DEX-COOL’ (silicate-free) coolant. you don’t need to add anything else.

If coolant other than DEX-COOLis added to I the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the A CAUTIONI engine coolantwill require change sooner-- at I 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, Adding only plain water to your cooling system whichever occurs first. Damage causedby the can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other use of coolant otherthan DEX-COOL@is not liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper covered by your new vehicle warranty. coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant warning systemis set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, your enginecould get too hotbut you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned. Use a 50150 mixture of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant.

6-27 Checking Coolant NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t becovered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer checkyour cooling system. i NOTICE: When your engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to at the COLD mark or a little higher. When your engine add extra inhibitorsor additives which claim to is warm, the level should be upto the HOT mark or a improve thesystem. These can be harmful. little higher.

6-28 If this comes on, it means you’re low on CAUTION: LOW engine coolant. A COOLANT lbrning the radiator pressure capwhen the engine and radiator arehot can allow steam and scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou badly. With the coolant recovery tank,you will almost Adding Coolant never have to add coolantat the radiator. Never turn the radiatorpressure cap even a If you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL@ -- coolant mixtureat the coolant recovery tank, but be little -- when the engine andradiator arehot. careful not tospill it. If thecoolant recovery tank is completelyempty, add + coolant to the radiator. (See “Engine Overheating’’ in the Index.) ’ /1\ CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and itwill burn if the engineparts arehot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hotengine.

6-29 Radiator Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid The power steering NOTICE: fluid reservoir is toward

Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolantloss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap lineup with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

When you replace your radiator pressure cap,a GM cap is recommended. 3100 Engine Thermostat Engine coolant temperatureis controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. When you replace your thermostat, aGM thermostat is recommended.

6-30 How To Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the andcap wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then removethe cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick. The level should beat the “C” mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine

6-31 What to Use Adding Washer Fluid To determine what kindof fluid to use, see ‘‘Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. Failure touse the proper fluid can causeleaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid A What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.If you will be operating your vehicle inan area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Open the cap labeledWASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

6-32 Brakes NOTICE: Brake Fluid When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and P other partsof the washersystem. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washerfluid. Fill your washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs. which could damage the tankif it is completely full. Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in Your brake master cylinder reservoiris here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. your windshieldwasher. It can damage your washersystem and paint. There are onlytwo reasons why the brake fluid levelin the reservoir might go down. The fxst is that the brakefluid goes down toan acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system.If it is, you should have your brake system fwd, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t workat all. 6-33 So, it isn’t a good idea to “topoff’ your brake fluid. What toAdd Adding brake fluidwon’t correct a leak. If you add fluid When you do need brake fluid,use only DOT-3 brake when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid -- such as Delco Supreme ll@(GM Part fluid when you get new brake linings.You should add No. 12377967). Use new brake fluidfrom a sealed (or remove) brakefluid, as necessary, only when workis container only. done on the brake hydraulic system. Always clean the brake fluid reservoircap and the area b - around the cap before removing it.This will help keep A CAUTION: dirt from enteringthe reservoir. I If you have too much brakefluid, it can spill on CAUTIOP’ the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is A hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid With thewrong kind of fluid in your brake only when work is done on the brake system, your brakes maynot work well, or they hydraulic system. may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.

When your brake fluid falls toa low level, your brake warning light will comeon. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index.

6-34 Brake Wear NOTICE: Your vehicle has four-wheel discbrakes.

0 Using the wrong fluid can badly damage Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that brake system parts. For example, just afew make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. Thesound may drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake moving (except when you are pushing on the brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be pedal firmly). replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. 0 If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off your brakeswon’t work well. That could lead to immediately. See “Appearance Care’’ in an accident. When you hear the brakewear the Index. warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

I NOTICE: Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.

6-35 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake Replacing Brake System Parts squeal when the brakes arefirst applied or lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with The braking system on a modem vehicle is complex.Its your brakes. many parts have tobe of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessaryto help Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect GM brake parts.When you replace partsof your braking brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the system -- for example, when your brake linings wear proper sequenceto GM specifications. down and you have to have newones put in -- be sure Brake linings should always be replaced as complete you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you axle sets. don’t, your brakesmay no longer work properly.For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong See “Brake System Inspection” in Section7 of for your vehicle, the balance between your front and this manual under Part C “Periodic rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking Maintenance Inspections.” performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement Brake Pedal Travel brake parts. See your dealerif the brake pedal does not return to normal height, orif there is a rapid increase in pedal Battery travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Every new Pontiac has an ACDelco Freedom@ battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s Brake Adjustment time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco Every time you apply the brakes, withor without the Freedom battery. Get one that hasthe replacement vehicle moving, your brakes adjustfor wear. number shown on the original battery’s label.

6-36 Vehicle Storage Halogen Bulbs If you’re not going todrive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your batteryfrom running down. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burstif you drop or scratch thebulb. You or /I\ CAUTION: others couldbe injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulbpackage. Batteries haveacid that can burnyou and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index Headlamps for tipson working arounda battery without 1. Open the hood and support properly. getting hurt. 2. Remove the two bolts from the top of the Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle headlamp assembly. for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index. Bulb Replacement In this section, you’ll find directions for changing the bulbs on your vehicle. See “Replacement Bulbs” thein Index to find the typeof bulb you should use.

6-37 3. Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the 5. Turn the lamp socket ring a quarter of a turn vehicle. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping counterclockwise to remove it from the the paint on the vehicle while removing. headlamp assembly. 4. Lift the plastictab on the electrical connector and pull the connector. 8. Turn the lamp socket ring a quarterof a turn clockwise to place it backinto the r headlamp assembly. 9. Lift the plastic tab on the electrical connectorand replace the connector. 10. Carefully replace the headlamp assembly.Be careful to avoid scratchingor chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing the assembly. 11. Replace the two bolts on the top of the headlamp assembly. 12. Close the hood.

6. Pull the lamp from the socket. 7. Place the new lamp into the socket. Hold the lamp at the base, being careful not to touch the lamp with your fingers. The oil from your fingers will cause the lamp to fail.

6-39

~~ Front lhrn Signal A 1. Open the hood and support properly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket. 6. Place the new bulb into the socket. 7. Turn the bulb socket a quarter of a turn clockwise 2. Remove the two bolts from the topof the to replace it. headlamp assembly. 8. Carefully replace the headlamp assembly. Be 3. Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on vehicle. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the vehicle while replacing. the paint onthe vehicle while replacing. 9. Replace the two bolts on the top of the 4. Turn the front sidemarker bulb socketa quarter of a headlamp assembly. turn counterclockwiseto remove. 10. Close the hood.

6-40 3. Remove the bulb by turning it a quarter of a turn counterclockwise. 4. Place the new bulb into the bulb socket. 2. Reach through the access openingin the trunk and remove the slotted vent by squeezing the ends and 5. Turn the bulb a quarterof a turn clockwise to pulling down. replace. Replace the vent you removed earlier. 6. Close the trunk.

6-41 Taillamps 1. Unhook the convenience net (if equipped) and remove.

5. Carefdly remove the taillamp assembly. Be carefid to avoid scratching or chipping the paint onthe vehicle.

2. Unscrew the lower convenience net hook attachment. 3. Pull the trunk trim carpeting back from the rear of the trunk. 4. Remove the upper trunk trim hook and the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp.

6-42 6. Turn the lamp socket a quarterof a turn 7. Remove the bulb. counterclockwise to remove. 8. Place the new bulb into the socket. 9. Turn the lamp socket a quarterof a turn clockwise to replace it. 10. Carefully replace the taillamp assembly. Be careful to avoid scratchingor chipping the vehicle paint. 11. Reverse Steps 1 through 4. 12. Close the rear compartment.

6-43 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from Your new vehicle comes with high-qualitytires made by the windshield. a leading tire manufacturer.If you ever havequestions about your tire warranty and where toobtain service, see your PontiacWarranty booklet for details. 1 ‘ CAUTION: A3 Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. 0 Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-outand a serious accident. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in the Index. CAUTION: (Continued) 2. Lift the release clip witha screwdriver and pull the blade off the wiper arm. 3. Push the new wiper blade securely onto the wiper arm. For wiper blade replacement length and type, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index.

6-44 CAUTION: (Continued) NOTICE:

Underinflated tires pose the same danger Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflationor as overloadedtires. The resulting accident overinflation is all right.It’s not. your tires could cause serious injury. Check all tires If don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can frequently to maintain the recommended get the following: pressure. Tire pressure should bechecked when your tires arecold. 0 Too much flexing Overinflated tires are more likely to be Too much heat cut, puncturedor broken by a sudden Tire overloading impact -- such as when you hit a pothole. Bad wear Keep tires at therecommended pressure. Bad handling Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your Bad fuel economy. tread is badly worn, or if your tires have If your tires havetoo much air (overinfla.tion), been damaged, replacethem. you can get thefollowing: Unusual wear Bad handling Inflation -- Tire Pressure Rough ride The Tire-Loading Information label, whichis on the Needless damage from road hazards. inside of the trunk lid, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

6-45 When to Check The purposeof regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wearfor all tires onthe vehicle. The first Check your tires oncea month or more. rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Don’t forget your compact sparetire. It should be at Maintenance Services” in the Indexfor scheduled 60 psi (420 Pa). rotation intervals. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gageto check tire I I pressure. You can’t tellif your tires are properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaksby keeping out dirt and moisture. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual When rotating your tires, alwaysuse the correct rotationI wear, rotate your tires as soonas possible and check pattern shown here. wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or Don’t include the compactspare tire in your wheels. See “When It’s Timefor New Tires” and tire rotation. “Wheel Replacement”later in this section for more information.

6-46 After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and When It’s Time forNew Tires rear inflation pressures as shown onthe Tire-Loading One way to tell when it’s Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts time for new tires is to are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” in check the treadwear the Index. indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. L Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose .. I after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change awheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where thewheel YOUneed a new tire if anyof the following statements attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can are true: use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be 0 You can see the indicators at three or more places sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you around the tire. need to, to get all the rust or dirtoff. (See 0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.) tire’s rubber. I I 0 The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cordor fabric. 0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split. 0 The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired wellbecause of the size or location of the damage. 6-47 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and sizeof tires you need, look at A CAUTION: the Tire-Loading Information label. The tires installedon your vehicle whenit was new had Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while a Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec) driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, (radial andbias-belted tires), thevehicle may not get ones with that sameTPC Spec number. That way handle properly, and you could havea crash. your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed Using tires of different sizes may also cause to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, damage to yourvehicle. Be sure touse the same traction, ride and other things during normal serviceon size and type tires onall wheels. your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by “MS” an It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, (for mud and snow). though. It was developed for use on your vehicle. If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. I A CAUTION: If you usebias-ply tires on yourvehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

6-48 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear The following information relates to the system The treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon developed by the United States National Highway the wear rateof the tire when tested under controlled Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by conditions on a specified government test course. treadwear, traction and temperature performance.(This For example, a tire graded 150 would wearone and applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course grades are molded on the sidewallsof most passenger as a tire graded100. The relative performanceof tires car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system depends upon the actual conditionsof their use, does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, however, and may depart significantly from the norm space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with due to variations in driving habits, service practices and nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to30 cm), differences in road characteristics and climate. or to some limited-production tires. 'haction -- A, B, C While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respectto these The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are B, A, grades, they must also conform to Federal safety and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stopon requirements and additional General Motors Tire wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

6-49 Temperature -- A, B, C Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wearor The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and Cy representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the alignment heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under may need to be reset.If you notice yourvehicle vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, your wheels controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory may need to be rebalanced. test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and Wheel Replacement excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked, or badly rusted which all passenger car tires must meet under the or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. Ifthe B and A represent higher levels of performance on the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not Your dealer will know the kindof wheel you need. overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or Each new wheel should have thesame load-canying excessive loading, either separatelyor in combination, capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. same way asthe one it replaces. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original The wheels on your vehiclewere aligned and balanced equipment parts. This way, you willbe sure to have carefully at the factoryto give you the longest tirelife the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your and best overall performance. Pontiac model.

6-50 ’ Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION: CAUTION: Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel ‘ A bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be + dangerous. It could affect thebraking and Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is handling of your vehicle, make your tireslose dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or air and makeyou lose control. You could have how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly a collision in which you or others could be and cause an accident. If you have to replace a injured. Always use the correctwheel, wheel wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel. bolts andwheel nuts forreplacement. Tire Chains

NOTICE: NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith If your vehicle has P225160R16 size tires, don’t bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or use tirechains. They can damage yourvehicle odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper because there’s not enough clearance. height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire NOTICE: (Continued) chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See “Changing a FlatTire” in the Index for more information. .~ Appearance Care NOTICE: (Continued) Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous.Some Use another type of traction device only if its are toxic. Others can burst into flameif you strike a manufacturer recommends it foruse on your vehicle match or get them on a hotpart of the vehicle. Some are and tire size combination and road conditions. dangerous if you breathe their fumes a in closed space. When you use anything froma container to cleanyour Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust and instructions. And always open your doors or or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, windows when you’re cleaningthe inside. and don’t spin your wheels. Never use these to clean your vehicle: If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install them on thefront tires. a Gasoline If you have other tires, use tire chains only where 0 Benzene legal and only when you must. Use only SAE 0 Naphtha Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for 0 CarbonTetrachloride your tires. Install them on the fronttires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends 0 Acetone securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain 0 PaintThinner manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten 0 Turpentine them. If the contact continues, slow down until it 0 LacquerThinner stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with Nail Polish Remover chains on will damage your vehicle. They can all be hazardous-- some more than others -- and they can all damageyour vehicle, too.

6-52 Don’t use anyof these unless this manual says you can. Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: on Fabric Alcohol 1. Vacuum and brushthe area to remove any loose dirt. Laundry Soap 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask 0 Bleach surrounding trim along stitchor welt lines. ReducingAgents 3. Mix powdered cleaner followingthe directions on Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle the container label toform thick suds. Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose4. Use suds only and apply witha clean sponge. Don’t dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces saturate the material and don’t rubit roughly. with a clean, damp cloth. 5. As soon as you’ve cleanedthe section, use a sponge Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner to removethe suds. and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towelcloth. or stains very well. You can get GM-approved cleaning 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and letdry. products from your dealer.(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Here are some cleaning tips: Stains causedby such thingsas catsup, coffee (black), Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. egg, fruit, fruitjuice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. blood can be removedas follows: 0 Carefully scrape off any excess stain. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the 0 Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area soiled area with cool water. often. A soft brush may be usedif stains are stubborn. 2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire cleaner instructions described earlier. area immediately or it will set. 6-53 3. If an odor lingers after cleaningvomit or urine, Cleaning Leather treat the area witha waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water anda mild soap or of lukewarm water. saddle soap and wipedry with a soft cloth. Then,let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. 4. Let dry. For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your Stains caused by candy,ice cream, mayonnaise, chili dealer for this product. sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: 0 Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polishon leather. 2. First, clean with cool water and allow to 0 Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned dry completely. immediately. Ifdirt is allowed to workinto the 3. If a stain remains, follow instructionsfor finish, it canharm the leather. Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner. Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Cleaning Vinyl Use only mild soap and waterto clean the top surfaces Use warm water anda clean cloth. of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield 0 Rub with a clean, damp clothto remove dirt. You and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield may have to do it more than once. under certain conditions. 0 Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get themoff quickly. Usea clean Cleaning Interior PlasticComponents cloth and a vinyVleather cleaner. See your dealer Use only a mild soap and water solution ona soft for this product. cloth or sponge. Commercialcleaners may affect the surface finish.

6-54 Cleaning the Built-in Child Restraint Cleaning Glass Surfaces Your built-in child restraint may be cleaned with mild Glass should be cleaned often.GM Glass Cleaner (GM soap and lukewarm water. Don’t use household cleaners. Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner They may weaken the harness or damage plastic parts. will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust filmson The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the child interior glass. restraint cushion and seatback with fastener strips.You Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because theymay can remove the pad, machine washit in cold water on a cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear gentle cycle and tumbledry it on a low heat setting. window, since they may have to be scrapedoff later. If Never bleach or iron the pad, and don’tdry clean it. abrasive cleaners are usedon the insideof the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Any temporary license should not be attached across the Child Restraint Harness defogger grid. Keep the safety belts andthe built-in child restraint Cleaning the Outsideof the harness clean anddry. Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is notclear after using the windshield I CAUTION: washer, or ifthe wiper blade chatters when running, A wax, sap or other material may be theon blade or windshield. Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built-in child restraint harness. If you do, they may be Clean the outsideof the windshield withGM severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@Powder (non-scratching able to provide adequate protection. Clean the glass cleaning powder), GMPart No. 1050011. The safety belts the child restraint harness only windshield is clean if beadsdo not form when you and rinse it with water. with mild soap and lukewarm water. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct raysof the sun. blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade Don’t use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Use by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in liquid hand, dishor car washing (mild detergent)soaps. full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your rinse the blade with water. dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum replace blades that look worn. based, or that contain acidor abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to Weatherstrips dry on the surface,or they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamoisor an all-cotton towel to Silicone grease on weatherstripswill make them last avoid surface scratches and water spotting. longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak. Apply silicone greasewith a clean cloth at leastevery six High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent vehicle. application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.) Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses Use lukewarmor cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle hand, dish or vehicle washing (mild detergent) soap to The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions of color, gloss retention and durability. under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care The best way to preserve your vehicle’sfinish is to keepit Occasional waxingor mild polishing of your vehicleby clean by washing it often with lukewarm or coldwater. hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

6-56 Your vehicle has a “basecoatjclearcoat” paint finish. Cleaning AluminumWheels The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes (If Equipped) that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatjclearcoat Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with paint finish. mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.A wax may then be applied. NOTICE: I The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or a basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay dull the abrasive cleaning brusheson them becauseyou could finish or leave swirlmarks. damage the surface. Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfacesare subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that cantake their toll overa period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Cleaning Tires Sheet Metal Damage To clean your tires, usea stiff brush witha tire cleaner. If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or NOTICE: replaced to restore corrosion protection.

When applying a tire dressing always take care Finish Damage to wipe off any overspray orsplash from all Any stone chips, fracturesor deep scratches in the finish painted surfaceson the body or wheelsof the should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode vehicle. Petroleum-based productsmay damage quickly and may develop intoa major repair expense. the paint finish. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available fromyour dealer or other service outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paintshop. Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust . Some weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate control can collect on the underbody. If these are not a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon removed, accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.This the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped pan and exhaust system even though they have discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched corrosion protection. into the paint surface. At least every spring, flush these materials from the Although no defect in the paintjob causes this, Pontiac underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of and other debris can collect.Dirt packed in closed areas new vehicles damagedby this fallout conditionwithin of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 OOO km) of purchase, Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do whichever occursfirst. this for you.

6-59 Appearance Care Materials Chart

6-60 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Engine Identification The 8th character in your VINis the engine code. This code will helpyou identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts. Service Parts Identification Label ENGINE/!& f ASSEMBLY You’ll find this label on the underside of your trunk lid. CODEMODEL YEAR PLANT It’svery helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: This is the legal identifierfor your vehicle. It appears on yourVIN, a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,on the the model designation, driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle.The VIN also 0 paint information and appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts a list of all production options and special labels and the certificates of title and registration. equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-61 Electrical System Fuses and Circuit Breakers kdd-On Electrical Equipment The wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links in the wiringitself. NOTICE: This greatly reduces the chanceof fires causedby electrical problems. Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some band is broken or melted, replace thefuse. Be sure you electrical equipment can damage your vehicle replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your and rating. Spare fuses are locatedin the instrument warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment panel. See “Underhood Electrical Center” in the Index. can keep other components from working as Headlamp Wiring they should. The headlamp wiringis protected by a circuit breaker in the underhood electrical center. An electrical overload Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to will cause the lampsto go on and off, or in some cases add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing to remain off. Ifthis happens, have your headlamp Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle”in the Index. system checked right away.

6-62 Windshield Wipers Instrument Panel Fuse Block The windshield wiper motor is protectedby a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in thefuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problemis fixed.

Some fuses arein a fuse block located insideof the glove box behind a small bin, on the right side. To open, pull on the plastic strap and pull the cover out. Thefuse block is inside. On the back edge ofthis cover is a fuse puller and a fuse usagechart. To use the fuse puller, place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plastic endof the fuse. Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pullout. it To reinstall the bin, position the lower end and turn the top into position. Press on the sides untilit snaps into place. 6-63 See Underhood Electrical Fuse Description FUSE USAGE CHART I Center For Spare Fuses I I I I WIPER Wipers MAUPGM MALL WIPER CIRCUIT I I BREAKERS STR WHL SUNROOF STR WHL Steering Wheel Illumination STR WHL CTRL RADIO I HEADLAMP I I I PWR LOCK HSEATILUM R DEFOG STR WHL Steering Wheel Control I I RAP HAZARD PWR MIR HVAC HI CTRL

~ GIG LTR INT LAMP STOP LAMP AUWCNSL CD CHG SUNROOF Sunroof

ECM CRUISE I/P - IGN SIR TURN RADIO Radio, Antenna ABS BTSl PWR LOCK Mall Module -- Power Locks

PWR DROP HVAC CTRL DlCRlVAC I I I I HSEATLUM Heated Seats, Power Lumbar CANISTER VENT DRL R DEFOG Rear Defog rintedin USA. For MoreInformation, See Owner’s Manual 10401979) RAP Retained Accessory Power, Mall Module Circuit Description HAZARD Hazard Flashers Breaker PWR MIR Power Mirrors HEADLAMP Headlamps HVAC HI HVAC Blower -- Hi SEAT Power Seat, Power Lumbar CIG LTR Cigarette Lighter,ALDL, Floor PWR WDO Power Windows Console Auxiliary Outlet Fuse Description INT LAMP Mall Module -- Interior lamps MALL PGM Mall Module -- Program STOP LAMP Stoplamp MALL Mall Module 6-64 AUWCNSL Auxiliary Power, Overhead Console Underhood Electrical CD CHG CD Changer Center -- Passenger’s Side ECM ECM CRUISE Cruise Control UP-IGN ChimeNall Module, Cluster, Trip Computer, Head-Up Display, Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock SIR Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (Air Bag) TURN Turn Signal ABS Anti-Lock Brakes BTSI PRNDL, Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock PWR DROP Power Drop Ignition Some fuses are in a fuse block on the passenger’s of side HVAC CTRL Blower Control, HVAC the engine compartment. Pulloff the cover labeled FUSES to expose thefuses. DIC/HVAC Rear Defog, HVAC, Driver Information Center, Daytime Running Lamps, Heated Seats Canister Vent Solenoid

DRL Daytime Running Lamps 6-65 0 0 RELAY COOL FAN COOL FAN 2 0 0 0 SERIES r"- ION MODULE ION MAIN 0 BAllMAIN 2 0 0 0 IQN MAIN 1 0 0 FUEL PUMP BAT MAIN 1 LZJ

(SUPERCHARGER IQN MAIN2 NEL PUMP SPEED 0 0

Fuse Description Fuse Description COOL FAN 2 Cool Fan 2 COOL FAN 1 Cool Fan1 HEADLAMPS Headlamps BATT MAIN 1 Ban Main 1 BAm MAIN 2 Battery Main2 IGN MAIN 2 Ign Main 2 IGNMAIN 1 Ign Main 1 B/ULP Trunk Release, Back-up Lamps

6-66 Fuse Description Fuse Description TRANSMISSION Automatic Transaxle: SPARE Spare Fuse Enable, Switch, Shift,PWM RADIO Radio, Keyless Entry,Theft mJEL PUMP Fuel Pump Shock Sensor, Trip AC CLU/ABS IGN AC Clutch, ABS Ignition Computer, HVAC Module, ABS Module, Security LED IGN1-UH MAF, Heated Sensors, HORN Horn Canister Prg, Boost Solenoid ALT SENSE Alt Sense IGN MODULE Ignition Module Diode Description INJ Fuel Injectors AC DIODE A/C Clu Diode ECM ECM/PCM Relay Description PARK LP ChimeMall Module, Taillamps, Parklamps, RELAY COOL FAN Cooling Fan Sidemarker Lamps, SERIES Dimmable Lamps RELAY FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump FUTURE Spare Fuse (ONLY Fuel Pump Speed Cont SPARE Spare Fuse SUPERCHARGER) FUEL PUMP SPEED SPARE Spare Fuse RELAY COOL FAN 2 Cooling Fan2 SPARE Spare Fuse RELAY A/C CLUTCH A/C Clutch SPARE Spare Fuse RELAY COOL FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 FOG LP Fog Lamps IGN MAIN Ign Main mTUm Spare Fuse RELAY HORN Horn SPARE Spare Fuse RELAY FOG LP Fog Lamp Replacement Bulbs Cooling System Including Reservoir Exterior Lamps ...... Bulb Number 3100 (CodeM) ...... 11 quarts (10.42L) Back-up ...... 3 156 3800 (Code K) ...... 12.3 quarts (11.65 L) Center High-Mounted Stop ...... 1141 3800 Supercharged (Code 1) ... 12.3 quarts (11.65 L) Front Parking/Turn Signal ...... 3357NA Refrigerant (R-l34a), Headlamps Air Conditioning* ...... 1.9 lbs. (0.85 kg) HighBeam ...... 9005 Engine Crankcase(Oil Change with Filter Change) Low Beam ...... 9006 3100 (Code M) ...... 4.5 quarts (4.2L) Stop/Tail/TurnSignal ...... 3057 3800 (Code K) ...... 4.5 quarts (4.2 L) FrontSidemarker ...... 194 3800 Supercharged (Code 1) ..... 4.5 quarts (4.2 L) RearSidemarker ...... 194 Fuel Tank ...... 18 gallons (68 L) *See “Air Conditioning Refrigerants ” later in this section. Capacities and Specifications Note: All capacities are approximate. When adding,be Please refer to “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants” sure to fill the appropriate level, as recommendedin this in the Index for more information. manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Automatic Transaxle with Overdrive See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” inthe Index Pan Removal and Replacement ..... 8 quarts (7.5 L) for more information. After Complete Overhaul ...... 10 quarts (9.5 L) When drainingheplacing converter or auxiliary coolel; more fluid mybe needed.

6-68 3100 (Code M) Engine Specifications 3800 Supercharged (Code 1) Type ...... V6 Engine Specifications Displacement ...... 191CID (3.1LL82) Type ...... V6 FiringOrder ...... 1-2-3-4-5-6 Displacement ...... 23 1 CID(3.8L L67) Thermostat Temperature ...... 195OF (9 1O C) FiringOrder ...... 1-6-5-4-3-2 Horsepower ...... 160 ThermostatTemperature ...... 195"F(9l0C) Horsepower ...... 240 3800 (Code K) Engine Specifications Type ...... V6 Vehicle Dimensions Displacement ...... 231 CID (3.8L L36) Wheelbase ...... 110.5 inches (280.7 cm) FiringOrder ...... 1-6-5-4-3-2 Tread Width ...... Thermostat Temperature ...... 195OF (9 1O C) Front ...... 61.7 inches (156.8 cm) Horsepower ...... 195 Rear ...... 61.1 inches (155.2 cm) Overall Length ...... 196.5 inches (499.1 cm) OverallWidth ...... 72.7inches (1 84.5 cm) Overall Height ...... 54.7 inches (139 cm) Normal Maintenance Spark Plugs Replacement Parts 3100 (Code M) ...... AC Vpe 41-940 Gap: 0.060 inches (1.52 cm) Air Cleaner Filter 3800 (Code K) ...... AC Type 41-921 All Engines ...... A1208C Gap: 0.060 inches (1.52 cm) Battery 3800 Supercharged (Code 1) . . AC Qpe 41-921 or NGK 5pePTR4B- 15 3100 (Code M) ...... 600CCA Gap: inches (1.52 cm) 3800 (Code K) ...... 690 CCA 0.060 Wiper Blades 3800 Supercharged (Code 1) CCA ...... 770 vpe ...... Hook Engine Oil Filter Length ...... 20inches (50.8 cm) All Engines ...... AC PF47 - PCV Valve Air Conditioning Refrigerants All Engines ...... CV892C Radiator Cap Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.If All Engines ...... AC RC27 the air conditioning systemin your vehicle needs refrigerant, besure the proper refrigerant is used.If you’re not sure, ask your dealer.

6-70 Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle.Your vehicle needs these services to retainits safety, dependability and emission control performance.

7-2 Introduction 7- 14 Part B: OwnerChecks and Services 7-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 7- 18 Part C: PeriodicMaintenance Inspections 7-2 How this Section is Organized 7- I9 Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-20 Part E: MaintenanceRecord 7-5 Maintenance Schedule

7-1 I Introduction tMPORTANT- KEEP ENGINE OIL Your Vehicle and the Environment AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps keepto your RECOMMENDED vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the II environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenancecan even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflationcan increase the level of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our environment, andto keep your vehicle ingood I Protection 1 condition, please maindn your vehicle properly. Plan How This Section is Organized Wl The remainder of this section is divided into five parts: “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan what to have done and how often. Someof these supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your services can be complex, so unless you are technically Warranty andOwner Assistance booklet, or your qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should Pontiac dealer for details. let your dealer’s service departmentor another qualified service centerdo these jobs.

7-2 “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains CAUTION: important inspections that your dealer’s service A department or another qualified service center should perform. Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous.In tryingto dosome jobs, you can “Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” lists some recommended products to help keep your vehicle be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance properly maintained. These products,or their work only if you have the requiredknow-how equivalents, should be used whetheryou do the work and the propertools and equipment for the job. yourself or haveit done. If you have any doubt, havea qualified technician do the work. “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a placefor you to record the maintenance performedon your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed,be If you are skilled enoughto do some work on your sure to write it down in this part. This will help you vehicle, you will probably want to get the service determine when your next maintenance should be done. information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance the Index. receipts. They may be neededto qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. “Part B: Owner Checks and Services’’ tells you what should be checked and when. Italso explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition. Part A: Scheduled Maintenance This part tells youthe maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them.you If Services go to your dealer for your service needs, you’llknow Using Your Maintenance Schedule that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuineGM parts. We at General Motors want to help you keepyour vehicle in good working condition. But we don’tknow The proper fluids and lubricantsto use are listed in exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive veryshort Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive these. All parts should be replaced andall necessary long distances allthe time in very hot, dusty weather. repairs done before youor anyone else drives You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you the vehicle. may drive it to work, todo errands or in many This schedule is for vehicles that: other ways. 0 carry passengers and cargo within recommended Because of all the different ways people use their limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s vehicles, maintenance needs vary.You may even need Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find Vehicle” in the Index. in the schedules in this section. So please read this 0 are drivenon reasonable road surfaces within legal section and note how youdrive. If you have any driving limits. questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer. 0 use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index.

7-4 Maintenance Schedule

The services shown in this schedule upto 100,000 miles * Your vehicle hasan Engine Oil Life Monitor.This (166 OOO km) should be performed after 100,000 miles monitor will show you when to change the engine oil (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown and filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 OOO km) and at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change. the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km). Under severe conditions, the indicatormay come on See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle Maintenance Inspections” following. more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months without an oil and filter change. Footnotes The system won’t detect dustin the oil. So if you drive ? The US. Environmental Protection Agency or the in a dusty area, be sure to change youroil and filter California Air Resources Board has determined that the every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify OIL SOON light comes on. Rememberto reset the the emission warrantyor limit recall liability priorto the Oil Life Monitor when theoil has been changed. For completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, more information, see “CHANGEOIL SOON light” urge that all recommended maintenance services be in the Index. performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance + A good time to check your brakesis during tire be recorded. rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance Inspections”in Part C of this schedule. Maintenance Schedule

7,500 Miles (12 500 km) I DATE I 0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 0 Rotate tires.See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil”in the Index. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.) 0 Inspect air cleaner filterif you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filterif necessary. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote $.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) 0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filterare changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. MILEAGE An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 7-6 I MaintenanceSchedule I

30,000 Miles (50 000 km) DATE I 0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. MILEAGE An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.) 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission ControlService. 0 Inspect fuel tank,cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuelcap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote?.) For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every36 months, whichever occursfist). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” inthis section. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)

37,500 Miles (62 500 km) DATE 0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil”in the Index. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” thein Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)

7-7 Maintenance Schedule 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil andfilter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil“ in the Index. MILEAGE An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnoteT.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. rfyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, thefluid and filter do not require changing.

7-8 I MaintenanceSchedule I

52,500 Miles (87 500 km) I DATE -1 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engineoil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” inthe Index. SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)

60,000 Miles (100 000km) DATE I 0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) For supercharged enginesonly: Check the supercharger oil level and addoil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in this section. An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote?.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission ControlService. (Continued) I Maintenance Schedule I

60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued) 0 Inspect fuel tank, capand lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace partsas needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote”f) 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) DATE 1 0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil”in the Index. An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote *.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil andfilter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving industy conditions. Replace filterif necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote “f) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)

7-10 I MaintenanceSchedule I

82,500 Miles (137 500 km) I DATE I 0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. SERVICED BY: See “Engine Oil” in the Index. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) I DATE I 0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission ControlService. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and linesfor damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace partsas needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0 For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in this section. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote”f) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) I MaintenanceSchedule I

97,500 Miles (162 500 km) DATE I 0 Check OilLife Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)

100,000 Miles (166 000 km) DATE I 0 Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission ControlService. 0 Replace spark plugs. An Emission ControlService. 0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. Ifyou do not useyour vehicle under anyof these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

7-12 I MaintenanceSchedule I

150,000 Miles (240 000 km) I DATE I 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant”in the Index for what to use. MILEAGE Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Sewice.

7-13 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check Listed below are owner checks and services which Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@ should be performed at the intervals specifiedto help coolant mixture if necessary. See “EngineCoohnt” in ensure the safety, dependability and emission control the Index for further details. performance of your vehicle. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluidsor lubricants are added to your Check the windshield washerfluid level in the vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin windshield washer tank and add the proper fluidif Part D. necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid”in the Index for further details. At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month It is importantfor you or a service station attendant to perjiorm these underhood checksat each fuel fill. Tire Inflation Check Engine Oil Level Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.See “Tires” in the Indexfor further details. Check the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Indexfor Cassette Deck Service further details. Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be doneevery 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems’’ in the Index for further details.

7-14 At Least Twice a Year Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See Restraint System Check “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. A fluid loss may Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your indicate a problem. Check the system and repair belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are if needed. working properly.If your vehicle hasa built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, At Least Once a Year latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Lookfor any other looseor damaged Key Lock Cylinders Service safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts. If Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built-inspecified in Part D. child restraint system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsor harness Body Lubrication Service straps replaced. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including thosefor the Also look for any openedor broken air bag coverings, hood, rear compartment,glove box door, console door and have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system and any folding seat hardware.Part D tells you what to does not need regular maintenance.) use. More frequent lubrication may be required when Wiper Blade Check exposed to a corrosive environment. Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appearworn or damaged or that streakor miss areas ofthe windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades, Cleaning” in the Index.

7-15 Starter Switch Check Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock(BTSI) Check

1- A CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does,you or others could be move suddenly. If it does,you or others could be r-injured. Follow the steps below. injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. around the vehicle. It should be parked on a 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking level surface. Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” regular brake. in the Index if necessary). NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be NOTE: Be ready to applythe regular brake ready to turn off the engine immediatelyif it starts. immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter 3. With the engineoff, turn the key to the RUN should work onlyin PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the starter works in any other position, your vehicle the regular brake,try to move the shift lever outof needs service. PARK (P)with normal effort.If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.

7-16 Ignition TransaxleLock Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set the While parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position. parking brake. The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With lever is in PARK (P). the engine running and transaxle NEUTRAL in (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regularbrake 0 The key should come out only in LOCK. pedal. Do this until the vehicle is heldby the parking brake only. Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePARK (P) Mechanism Check To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then 1release all brakes. Underbody FlushingService At least every spring, use plain water to flush any When you are doing this check, your vehicle corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to could begin to move. You or others could be clean thoroughly any areas where mud and otherdebris injured and property could be damaged. Make can collect. sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once shouldthe vehicle begin to move. Part C: Periodic Maintenance cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumesinto the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust’’in Inspections the Index. Listed below are inspections and services which shouldbe Engine Cooling System Inspection perfunned at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department Inspect the hoses and have them replacedif they are or other qual$ed service centerdo these jobs. Make sure cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings any necessary repairs are completedat once. and clamps; replaceas needed. Clean the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure Proper procedures to perform these servicesmay be proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner pressure cap is recommended at least oncea year. Publications” in the Index. Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Throttle System Inspection Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the throttle systemfor interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as Inspect the front and rear suspensionand steering needed. Replace any components that have higheffort system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signsof or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and wear or lackof lubrication. Inspect the power steering cruise control cables. lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive Brake System Inspection axle boot sealsfor damage, tears or leakage. Replace Inspect the complete system. Inspect brakelines and seals if necessary. hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, Exhaust System Inspection chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake padsfor wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body including calipers, parking brake,etc. Check parking near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes missing or out-of-position partsas well as open seams, inspected more often if your driving habitsor conditions holes, loose connections or other conditions which could result in frequent braking. 7-18 Part D: Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT and Lubricants Key Lock Multi-Pu ose Lubricant, Superlube NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, partCylinders % (GM Part number or specification maybe obtained from your dealer. No. 12346241 or equivalent). Supercharger Supercharger Oil (GMPart USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT No. 12345982). See “Supercharger Engine Oil Engine Oil with the American Oil” in the Index. Petroleum Institute Certified For Windshield GM Optikleenw Washer Solvent Gasoline Engines “Starburst” Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) or symbol of the proper viscosity.To equivalent. determine the preferred viscosity Chassis Chassis Lubricant Part for your vehicle’s engine, see (GM Lubrication No. 12377985 or equivalent)or “Engine Oil” in the Index. lubricant meeting requirementsof Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean water NLG1#2, Category LB or GC-LB. (preferably distilled) and use only GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL@ or Hood Latch Lubriplate” Lubricant Aerosol Assembly, Havoline@DEX-COOL@ Coolant. (GM Part No. 12346293 or Secondary Latch, See “Engine Coolant”in the Index. equivalent) or lubricant meeting Pivots, spring requirements of NLGI # 2, Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11vv Brake Fluid Anchor and Category LB or GC-LB. System (GM Part No. 12377967 or Release Pawl equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid). Hood and Door Multi-Puose Lubricant, Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GMPart Hinges Superlube% (GM Part System No. 1052884 - 1 pint, 1050017 - 1 No. 12346241 or equivalent). quart, or equivalent). - Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Automatic DEXRONw-I11 Automatic Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Transaxle Transmission Fluid. 7-19 Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”can be added on date, odometer reading and who performed the service the following record pages. Also,you should retain all in theboxes provided after the maintenance interval. maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and is a convenient placeto store them. I i Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE MAINTENANCEREADING PERFORMEDSERVICED BY

7-20 I Maintenance Record

ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-21 Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-22 Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Here you will find outhow to contact Pontiacif you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtainservice publications and howto report any safety defects.

8-2 Pontiac Cares 8-10 Warranty Information 8-3 What Makes Up Pontiac Cares? 8- 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United 8-3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure States Government 8-5 Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone 8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the (TTY) Users Canadian Government 8-6 Pontiac Roadside AssistanceProgram 8-1 1 ReportingSafety Defects to General Motors 8-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance 8-11Ordering Service and Owner Publications 8-8 Pontiac Courtesy Transportation in Canada 8-9 GM Participation inan Alternative Dispute Resolution Program Pontiac Cares The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elementsare designed to make yourealize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer, appreciates your purchase decision, and is dedicated to takingcare of the most important person ... YOU! PONTIAC CARES is: A

1 valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac,feature a I that offers a multitude of benefits that cangive you safety, security,comfort and convenience.

With PONTIAC CARES, you are never more than a phone call awayfrom having your concern taken care of.

8-2 What Makes Up Pontiac Cares? Customer Satisfaction Procedure A 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) Bumper to Bumper Warranty CustomerAssistance RoadsideAssistance CourtesyTransportation All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoyable one, and are discussed in greater detail furtherin your owner’s manual. Pontiac is focusing on the changing needsof our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional levelof customer care throughout your ownership experience. Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm inour product and our services, and make you the most satisfied customer in the world.

8-3 Pontiac dealers have the facilities, trained technicians For help outsideof the United States and Canada, call and up-to-date information to promptly address any the following numbers as appropriate: concerns you may have. However, ifa concern has not 0 In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the following steps: 0 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concernscan 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135 already been reviewed with thesales, service or parts (English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) manager, contact the ownerof the dealershipor the general manager. 0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 STEP TWO -- If after contacting a memberof 0 In Bermuda, Barbados,Antigua and the British dealership management,it appears your concern cannot Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122 be resolved by the dealership without further help, 0 In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-13 15 contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-PM-CARES.In Canada, contact 0 In other overseas locations,call GM Overseas GM of Canada Customer Communication Centrein Distribution Corporation in Canadaat: Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or (905) 644-41 12. 1-800-263-7854 (French).

8-4 For prompt assistance, please have the following In Canada, write to: information available to give the Customer General Motorsof Canada Limited Assistance Representative: Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 0 Your name, address, home and business 1908 Colonel Sam Drive telephone numbers Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available Refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices. the top left of the instrument panel and visible When contacting Pontiac, please rememberthat your through the windshield.) concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the Dealership name and location dealer’s facilities, equipmentand personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step Onekt Vehicle delivery date and present mileage if you have a concern. Nature of concern Customer Assistancefor Text We encourage you to callus so we can give your inquiry Telephone (TTY) Users prompt attention. However,if you, wishto write Pontiac, To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing, or address your inquiry to: speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer P.O. Box 436008 Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate with Pontiac, MI 48343-6008 Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-POW. (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

8-5 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program Assistance program. This value-added service is intended to provide you with peaceof mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road. Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free numberis staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available24 hours a day, 365 days a year. We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone makingor arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest L Pontiac dealer. We will provide the following servicesfor 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expenseto you: a Fueldelivery a Keys locked in vehicle a Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service a Change a flat tire Jumpstarts Security While You Travel Courtesy Transportation -- See Pontiac Courtesy I-800-ROADSILE(1-800-762-3743) Transportation section for details As the proud ownerof a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside

8-6 We have quick, easy access to telephone numbersof the Pontiac reserves the rightto limit services or following additional services depending on your needs: reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac’s Hotels judgement the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence. 0 Glassreplacement While we hope that you never have the occasionto use Tire repair facilities our service, it is added security while traveling for you Rental vehicle or taxis and your family. Remember, we’reonly a phone call Airports or train stations away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance-- 1-8Oo-ROADSD3 or 1-800-762-3743. Police, fire department or hospitals In many instances, mechanical failures are covered Canadian Roadside Assistance under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However, Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive when other services are utilized, our advisors will Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere explain any payment obligations you might incur. in Canada orthe United States. Please refer to the For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please separate brochure provided bythe dealer or call provide the following information togive the advisor: 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Location of vehicle Telephone number of your location Vehicle model, year and color Mileage of vehicle 0 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 Vehicle license plate number

8-7 Pontiac Courtesy Transportation It applies toany repair covered under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) limited warranty, andto any 1998 Pontiac requiring repairas a result of product recall or special policy situations.For same day service, you are entitled to one-way shuttle serviceof up to 10 miles (16 km). If the vehicle requires multiple day repairs, you’re entitled to eithera Pontiac loaner or reimbursement for a rental car,up to $3O/day, for up to five days. Some state insurance regulations makeit impractical to rent vehicles to people under21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty rentinga vehicle, Pontiac will reimburse you,up to $3O/day, for any documented transportation you receive. In Canada, please consult yourGM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation. Pontiac strives to give you a worry-free ownership of your vehicle, and we realize the inconvenienceof being without a car. So Pontiac has come up witha way to eliminate any frustrations you might havewhen trying to get a ride to work, or wondering how you will get home. Well, your worries are over. Pontiac provides no-cost transportation whenyou bring your 1998 Pontiac in for warranty service. GM Participation in an Alternative BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to Dispute Resolution Program settle automotive disputes. This program is available This program is available in all 50 states and the District free of charge to customers who currently ownor lease a of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty GM vehicle. and Owner Assistance Information booklet for If you are not satisfied after following the Customer information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the change eligibility limitationsandor to discontinue its following address: participation in this program. BBB AUTO LINE Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealerare committed to Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. making sure you are completely satisfied with your new 4200 Wilson Boulevard vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation Suite 800 arises whereyou feel your concern has not been Arlington, VA 22203- 1804 adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 very successful. To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name There may be instances where an impartial third party and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can assist in arrivingat a solution to a disagreement and a statement of the nature of your complaint. regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and Vehicle Limited Warranty.To assist in resolving these other factors. disagreements, Pontiac voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE.

8-9 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Procedure beforeyou resort to AUTOLINE, but you may contact theBBB at any time. The BBB will attempt TO THE UNITED STATES to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary. If GOVERNMENT this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could be scheduled where eligible customers may present their cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic The arbitrator will makea decision which you may Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to accept or reject.If you accept the decision, GM will be notifying General Motors. bound by that decision. Theentire dispute resolution If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an procedure should ordinarily take about40 days from the investigation, andif it finds thata safety defect exists in time you file a claim until a decision is made. a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedy Some state lawsmay require you to use this program campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program in individual problems between you, your dealeror or in the courts. For further information, contact the General Motors. BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Pontiac Customer To contact NHTSA, you may either call the AutoSafety Assistance Center at 1-800-PM-CARES. Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123in Warranty Information the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: Your vehicle comes witha separate warranty booklet NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation that contains detailed warranty information. Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

8-10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) TO THE CANADIAN or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motorsof Canada Limited GOVERNMENT Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle 1908 ColonelSam Drive has a safety defect,you should immediately notify Oshawa, Ontario L1H8W Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may write to: Ordering Service and Owner Transport Canada Publications in Canada Box 8880 Service manuals, owner’smanuals and other service Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352 literature are availablefor purchase for all current and REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS past model General Motors vehicles. The toll-free telephone numberfor ordering information TO GENERAL MOTORS in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-PM-CARES or write: Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 436008 Pontiac, MI 48343-6008

8-11 1998 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONSORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicingof your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in thisbook and mailingit in with your check, money order, or credit card informationto Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 PONTIAC SERVICE MANUALS OWNER’S INFORMATION Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, intended to provide basic operational information about the electrical, steering, body, etc. vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 Schedule for all models. TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and UNIT REPAIR MANUAL Warranty Booklet. This manual provides information on unit repair service RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00 procedures, adjustments and specifications for the Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. 1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $1 0.00 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS SERVICE BULLETINS Service Publications are available for current and past Service Bulletins give technical service information needed model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETETHE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON OR ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-782-4356 THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO: Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern lime Helm, Incorporated RO. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For CrdiCard Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Disr) NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, the and also name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. s Mailcompleted order form to: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 H For purchases outsideU.S.A. please writeto the above address for quotation. 1 p (CUSTOMERSNAME)(ATTENTION)

T (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

mA=) CODE) (ZIP DAYTIMETELEPHONE NO. 0 GM-PON-ORD98Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers:All listed prices are quotedin US.funds. Canadian residents o'b ligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.) are to make checks payablein U.S.funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$11 50 plus the U.S. order processing. $@% NOTES

8-14 Section 9 Index

Accessory Power outlet ...... 2-58 Automatic Adding Equipment to the outside of Your Vehicle ...... 6-3 Auxiliary Temp Control ...... 3-4 AirBag ...... 1-23 Doorhcks ...... 2.6. 2.47 How it Works ...... 1-24 Check ...... 7-15 Readiness Light ...... 1.23. 2.67 Fluid ...... 6-22 Air Cleaner ...... 6-20 Operation ...... 2-21 Air Conditioning ...... 3.3. 3.7 Park Mechanism Check ...... 7-17 Air Conditioning Refrigerants ...... 6-70 Alignment and Balance. Tire ...... 6-50 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning 6-57 Backglass Antenna ...... 3-21 ...... With a Trailer ...... 4.37 Anti-Lock Battery ...... 6-36 Brake System Warning Light ...... 2.67. 4.9 Jump Starting 5-3 Brakes ...... 4-7 ...... Anti.Theft. Radio 3-27 Replacement, Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-10 ...... Resynchronizing, Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-11 Appearance Care ...... 6-52 Warnings ...... 5-3,5-5, 6-37 Appearance Care Materials Chart ...... 6-60 Battery Replacement ...... 2-10 ArbitrationProgram ...... 8-9 Arming Confirmation 2-15 BatterySaver ...... 2-43 ...... BBB Auto Line ...... 8-9 Arming with the Power Lock Switch...... 2-14 Before leaving on a Long Trip...... 4-24 Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter.... 2-15 BetterBusiness Bureau Mediation ...... 8-9 Ashtrays and Lighter ...... 2-57 Blizzard .... 4-29 Audio Controls. Steering Wheel ...... 3-29 ...... Audio Equipment. Adding ...... 3-30 Audio Systems ...... 3-10

9-1 Brake Care of Your CassetteTape Player ...... 3-31 Adjustment ...... 6-36 Care of Your Compact Disc Player ...... 3-32 hti-Lock ...... 4-7 Care of Your Compact Discs ...... 3-32 Fluid ...... 6-33 Cassette Deck Service ...... 7-14 Master Cylinder ...... 6-33 Cassette Tape Player ...... 3.12. 3.16 Parking ...... 2-26 Cassette Tape Player Care ...... 3-31 PedalTravel ...... 6-36 Cassette Tape Player Errors ...... 3.14. 3.17 Replacing System Parts ...... 6-36 CD Player Thefi-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-27 System Warning Light ...... 2-66 Center Console Storage ...... 2-54 Trailer ...... 4-37 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement .... 6-41 Transaxle Shift Interlock ...... 2-29 Center Passenger Position ...... 1-28 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check ...... 7-16 Certification Label ...... 4-32 Wear ...... 6-35 Chains.Safety ...... 4-36 WhattoAdd ...... 6-34 Chains. Tire ...... 6-51 Braking ...... 4-6 Changing a Flat Tire...... 5-27 Braking in Emergencies ...... 4- 12 Charging System Light ...... 2-65 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 2-16 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-68 BTSI ...... 2-29 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 6-59 BTSICheck ...... 7-16 Child Restraints ...... 1-52 Built in Child Restraints ...... 1-38 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position...... 1-58 Adjusting the Harness Height ...... 1-40 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position ...... 1-60 Removing a Child from ...... 1-50 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-62 Securing a Child in ...... 1-45 TopStrap ...... l-58 Storing ...... l-51 WheretoPut ...... ,...... , l-56 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-37 Cigarette Lighter ...... 2-57 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ...... 6-62 Canadian Roadside Assistance ...... 8-7 Cleaner. Air ...... 6-20 Capacities and Specifications ...... 6-68 Cleaning CarbonMonoxide AluminumWhels ...... 6-57 ...... 2-12,2-31,2-32,4-30, 4-36 Exterior Lampshnses ...... 6-56 Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child Restraint Harness ...... 6-55 Fabric ...... 6-53

9-2 Glass ...... 6-55 TankRecovery ...... 5-20 Inside of Your Vehicle ...... 6-53 To Use the Engine Heater ...... 2-20 InstrumentPanel ...... 6-54 Cooling System ...... 5-18 Interior Plastic Components ...... 6-54 Courtesy Lamps ...... 2-42 Leather ...... 6-54 Courtesy Transportation ...... 8-8 Outside of Your Vehicle ...... 6-56 Cruise Control ...... 2-37 Special Problems ...... 6-53 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users...... 8-5 Stains ...... 6-53 Customer Assistance Information ...... 8-1 Tires ...... 6-58 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 8-3 Vinyl ...... 6-54 Wheels ...... 6-57 Damage. Finish ...... 6-58 Windshield and Wiper Blades ...... 6-55 Damage.SheetMetal 6-58 Climate Control System ...... 3-2 ...... Clock, Setting the 3-10 DaytimeRunning Lamps ...... 2-41 ...... DeadBattery 5-3 Column Shift ...... 2-28 ...... ComfortControls 3-1 Defects. Reporting Safety ...... 8-10 ...... Defensive Driving 4-2 CompactDisc Care 3-32 ...... Defogger. Rear Window ...... 3-9 Compact Disc Player ...... 3-19, 3-22 Defogging and Defrosting ...... 3-4. 3-8 Compact Disc Player Care ...... 3-32 Defrosting.Defogging ...... 3-4. 3.8 Compact Disc Player Errors ...... 3-21,3-23, 3-25 DelayedIllumination ...... 2.472.43. Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-37 Dimensions.Vehicle ...... 6-69 ConsoleShift ...... 2-29 Disarming with the Remote Keyless Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2- 14, 2-50 EntryTransmitter ...... 2-15 Content Theft-Deterrent, Arming and Disarming ...... 2-51 Disarming with Your Key ...... 2-15 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-6 Dolby@ B Noise Reduction ...... 3.14. 3.18 Convenience Net 2-57 ...... DoorLocks ...... 2. 4 Convex Outside Mirror ...... 2-53 Driver Information Center ...... 2-76 Coolant ...... 6-26 Driver Position ...... 1-14 BleedValves ...... 5-24 Driver’s Temperature Knob. Automatic and Heater, Engine ...... 2-20 Auxiliary Temp Control ...... 3-5

9-3 Driving Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 2-73 City ...... 4-22 Coolant Temperature Light ...... 2-73 Defensive ...... 4-2 Coolant Temperature Light ...... 2-76 Drunken ...... 4-3 Coolant. What to use ...... 6-27 Freeway ...... 4-23 Exhaust ...... 2-31 In a Blizzard ...... 4-29 Identification ...... 6-61 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-5 OilLmelCheck ...... 7-14 IntheRain ...... 4-19 Overheating ...... 5-15 Night ...... 4-17 Running While Parked ...... 2-32 On Curves ...... 4-12 Specifications ...... 6-69 On Grades While Towing a Trailer ...... 4-39 StartingYour ...... 2-17 On Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-25 EngineOil ...... 6-13 On Snow and Ice ...... 4-28 Additives ...... 6-19 Throughwater ...... 4-21 Checking ...... 6-14 WetRoads ...... 4-19 Used ...... 6-19 Winter ...... 4-27 What Kind of Oil to Use ...... 6-16 WithaTrailer ...... 4-37 When to Add ...... 6-15 Driving at Night ...... 4-17 When to Change ...... 6-19 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ...... 4-19 Engine Oil Life Monitor ...... 6-19 Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...... 4-21 Enhanced Traction Control System ...... 4-11 DIU ...... 2-41 Enhanced Traction System Warning Light ...... 2-68 Drunken Driving ...... 4-3 Entering Programming Mode ...... 2-46 Ethanol ...... 6-5 Exhaust. Engine ...... 2-31 Electrical Equipment. Adding ...... 2.18.3.30. 6.62 Exit Lighting ...... 2.43.2.47 Electrical System ...... 6-62 Exterior Lamps 2-40 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror ...... 2-52 ...... Engine ...... 6.10.6.11. 6.12 Coolant ...... 6-26 Fabric Cleaning ...... 6-53 Coolant. Checking ...... 6-28 Fan Button. Automatic and Auxiliary Temp Control ..... 3-6 Coolant Heater ...... 2-20 Filling A Portable Fuel Container ...... 6-8 Coolant Level Check ...... 7-14 Filling Your Tank ...... 6-6 9-4 Filter. Air ...... 6-20 Headlamps FinishCare ...... 6-56 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-37 Finish Damage ...... 6-58 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 2-35 Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 3-32 Wiring ...... 6-62 Flashers. Hazard Warning ...... 5-2 Head-Up Display ...... 2-81 Flash-to-PassFeature ...... 2-35 Head-Up Display Care of ...... 2-83 Flat Tire. Changing ...... 5-27 Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance ...... 8-5 Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-19 Heating ...... 3.4. 3.8 FogLamps ...... 2-41 High-BeamHeadlamps ...... 2-35 With a Trailer ...... 4-37 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-25 Foreign Countries, Fuel ...... 6-5 Hill and Mountain Roads. Driving On...... 4-25 French Language Manual ...... ii Hitches. Trailer ...... 4-36 Front Reading Lamps ...... 2-44 Hood FrontTowing ...... 5-11 Checking Things Under ...... 6-8 Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement...... 6-40 Release ...... 6-9 Fuel ...... 6-3 Horn ...... 2-33 Filling Your Tank ...... 6-6 How This Section is Organized ...... 7-2 Gage ...... 2-75 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant RecoveryTank .... 5-20 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-5 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator ...... 5-22 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 6-62 How to Reset Oil Life Monitor ...... 2-80. 6-19 How to Reset the Change Oil Soon Light ...... 2-77. 6-19 HUD ...... 2-81 Gages Hydroplaning ...... 4-21 Engine Coolant Temperature ...... 2-73 Fuel ...... 2-75 Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-21 If a Tire Goes Flat...... 5-26 GloveBox ...... 2-54 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...... 5-17 Guide en Frangais ...... ii If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...... 5-16 If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...... 4-29 Ignition Positions ...... 2-16 Halogen Bulbs ...... 6-37 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ...... 7-17 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 5-2 Illuminated Entry ...... 2-42 HeadRestraints ...... l-6 9-5 Inflation. Tire ...... 6-45 Lamps Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror ...... 2-52 Courtesy ...... 2-42 Inspections Exterior ...... 2-40 Brake System ...... 7- 18 Interior ...... 2-42 Engine Cooling System ...... 7- 18 Rear Assist Handle Reading ...... 2-44 Exhaust Systems ...... 7- 18 Last Door Closed Locking ...... 2-6, 2-48 Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot ...... 7- 18 Latches, Seatback ...... 1-7 Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal ...... 7- 18 Leaving Programming Mode ...... 2-46 Steering ...... 7-18 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-7 Suspension ...... 7-18 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ...... 2-29 Throttle System ...... 7-18 Lighter and Ashtrays ...... 2-57 InstrumentPanel ...... 2-60 Lights Cleaning ...... 6-54 Air Bag Readiness ...... 1-23.2-67 Cluster ...... 2-62 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning...... 2.67.4.9 FuseBlock ...... 6-63 Brake System Warning ...... 2-66 Lamps ...... 2-42 Change Oil Soon ...... 2-77 Interior Lamps ...... 2-42 Charging System ...... 2-65 Door Aiar...... 2-80 Jack. Tire 5-29 Engine Coolant Temperature ...... 2-73 ...... Enhanced Traction System Warning 2-67 Jumpstarting ...... 5-3 ...... How to Reset the Change Oil Soon ...... 2.77. 6.219 Low Coolant Warning ...... 2-74 Key in the Ignition ...... 2-13 LowFuel ...... 2-75 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...... 7-15 LowOilLevel ...... 2-72 Keys ...... 2-2 LOWTRAC ...... 2-77 LowTraction ...... 2-70 Low Washer Fluid ...... 2-74 Labels Low Washer Fluid Warning ...... 2-77 Certification ...... 4-32 ServicePartsIdentification ...... 6-61 Oilwarning ...... 2-71 Tire-Loading Information ...... 4-3 1 Safety Belt Reminder ...... 1-9. 2-66 Vehicle Identification Number ...... 6-61 Service Engine Soon ...... 2-69 TCSOFF ...... 2-81 9-6 TRACOFF ...... 2-77 PeriodicMaintenance Inspections ...... 7-18 TractionControl System Warning ...... 2-69 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-19 Trunk Ajar Warning ...... 2-74 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-4 Trunk Ajar Warning ...... 2-77 Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 7-2 Loading Your Vehicle ...... 4-3 1 Maintenance. Underbody ...... 6-59 Lockout Deterrent ...... 2-5, 2-48 Maintenance When Trailer Towing ...... 4-40 Locks ...... 2-4 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 2-69 Automatic Door ...... 2-6, 2-47 Manual Front Seat ...... 1-2 Cylinders ...... 7-15 Matching Transmitters To Your Vehicle ...... 2-10 Door ...... 2-4 Methanol ...... 6-5 FrontDoor ...... 2-4 Mirrors ...... 2-52 Key Lock Cylinder Service ...... 7-15 Convex Outside ...... 2-53 PowerDoor ...... 2-5 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview ...... 2-52 RearDoors ...... 2-5 Inside Daymight Rearview ...... 2-52 Trunk ...... 2-12 Power Outside ...... 2-53 Locks and Lighting Choices ...... 2-45 Visor Vanity ...... 2-58 Loss of Control ...... 4- 16 MMT ...... 6-4 Low Coolant Warning Light ...... 2-74 Mode Buttons. Automatic and Auxiliary Temp Control . . 3-6 Low Fuel Light ...... 2-75 Multifunction Lever ...... 2-34 Low Oil Level Light ...... 2-72 Low Traction Light ...... 2-68 Net. Convenience ...... 2-57 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ...... 2-77 New Vehicle “Break-In” ...... 2-16 Lubricants and Fluids ...... 7- 19 Nightvision ...... 4-18 Lubrication Service, Body ...... 7-15 Nuisance Alarms ...... 2-15

Maintenance, Normal Replacement parts ...... 6-70 Odometer. Speedometer ...... 2-63 Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ...... 6-70 Odometer. Trip ...... 2-63 MaintenanceRecord ...... 7-20 Off-Road Recovery 4-14 Maintenance Schedule ...... 7- 1 ...... Introduction 7-2 Oil, Engine ...... 6-13 ...... Oil Life Monitor ...... 2-80. 6-19 Owner Checks and Services...... 7-14 Oil Warning Light ...... 2-71 9-7 Other Warning Devices ...... 5-2 Retained Accessory ...... 2- 17 Overhead Console ...... 2-55 Six-Way Driver’s Seat ...... 1-3 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ...... 5-15 Steering ...... 4-12 Overheating Engine ...... 5- 15 Steering Fluid ...... 6-30 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-14 Windows ...... 2-33 Owner Publications. Ordering ...... 8- 1 1 PowerDropFeature ...... 2-84 Power Steering Fluid ...... 6-30 Paint Spotting.Chemical ...... 6-59 Howtocheck ...... 6-31 Park Whattouse ...... 6-32 Shifting Into 2-27 When to Check ...... 6-31 ...... Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts 1-21 Shifting Out of 2-30 ...... Problems on the Road ...... 5-1 Parking Publications, Service and Owner ...... 8-11 AtNight ...... 2-13 Purse or Litter Bag Holder ...... 2-59 Brake ...... 2-26 Lots ...... 2-13 Over Things That Burn ...... 2-31 Radiator ...... 5-22 When You Are Ready to Leave. on Hills ...... 4-40 Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 6-30 With a Trailer on Hills ...... 4-39 Radio Reception. Understanding ...... 3-30 Passenger’s Temperature Knob. Automatic and Auxiliary Radios ...... 3-11.3-12.3-16.3-19. 3-22 Temp Control ...... 3-5 Rain. Driving In ...... 4-19 Pasing ...... 4-15 Rear WithaTrailer ...... 4-37 Outside Seat Position ...... 1-30 Performance Shift Light ...... 2-72 Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...... 1-33 Performance Shifting ...... 2-26 Seatpassengers ...... 1-30 Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-1 8 Towing ...... 5-13 PontiacCares ...... 8-2 Window Defogger ...... 3-9 Power Rear Armrest Storage ...... 2-57 Accessory Outlet ...... 2-58 Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps...... 2-44 DoorLocks ...... 2-5 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-7 OptionFuses ...... 6-63 Rearview Mirror, Electrochromic Daymight ...... 2-52 Outside Mirror ...... 2-53 Rearview Mirror, Inside Daymight ...... 2-52 9-8 Reclining Front Seatbacks ...... 1-5 safety Belt Extender ...... 1-67 Recovery Tank. Coolant ...... 5-20 SafetyBelts ...... 1-8 Refrigerants. Air Conditioning ...... 6-70 Adults ...... 1. 13 Remote Care ...... 6-55 Driver’s Unlock Control ...... 2.9.2.49 Center Passenger Position ...... 1-28 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-7 Children ...... 1-35 LocMUnlock Confirmation ...... 2.9.2.49 Driver Position ...... 1-14 Trunk Release ...... 2.9. 2.12 How to Wear Properly ...... 1-13 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire... 5-30 IncorrectUsage ...... 1.17.1.31.1.66.1.67 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-28 LapBelt ...... 1-28 Replacement Lap-Shoulder ...... 1.14. Bulbs ...... 6-68 Larger Children ...... 1-65 Parts ...... 6-70 Questions and Answers ...... 1-12 Wheel ...... 6-50 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ...... 1-30 Replacing Safety Belts ...... 1-68 Rear Seat Passengers ...... 1-30 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 8-10 Reminder Light ...... 1.9.2.66 Restraints Replacing Parts After a Crash ...... 1-68 Built in Child ...... 1-38 Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-22 Checking ...... 1-68 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...... 1-15 Child ...... 1-52 Smaller Children and Babies ...... 1-35 Head ...... 1-7 UseDuring Pregnancy ...... 1-21 Replacing Parts After a Crash ...... 1-68 WhyTheyWork ...... 1-9 System Check ...... 7-15 Safety Chains ...... 4-36 Resynchronizing Your Keyless Entry Transmitter...... 2-1 1 Safety Defects. Reporting to General Motors ...... 8-11 Retained Accessory Power ...... 2-17 Safety Defects. Reporting to the Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-22 Canadian Government ...... 8-11 Roadside Assistance. Canadian ...... 8-7 Safety Defects. Reporting to the Roadside Assistance. Pontiac ...... 8-6 United States Government ...... 8-10 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ...... 5-39 Safety Warnings and Symbols ...... iii Roof Console Reading Lamps ...... 2-44 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-4 Rotation. Tires ...... 6-46

9-9 Seatback Signaling Turns ...... 2-34 Latches ...... 1-7 Skidding ...... 4-16 RecliningFront ...... 1-5 Sound Equipment. Adding ...... 3-30 Seats Spare Tire. Compact ...... 5-37 Four- Way Power Lumbar Driver’s ...... 1-4 Specifications and Capacities ...... 6-68 Heated ...... 1-5 Specifications. Engine ...... 6-69 Restraint Systems ...... 1- 1 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance ...... 8-5 Controls ...... l-2 Speedometer/Odometer ...... 2-63 Six-Way Power Driver’s ...... 1-3 SRS ...... l-22 TWO-Way Manual Front ...... 1-2 Stains. Cleaning ...... 6-53 TWO-Way Manual Lumbar ...... 1-4 Starter Switch Check ...... 7-16 Service ...... 6-2 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-17 Bulletins, Ordering ...... 8- 11 Steering ...... 4-12 Engine Soon Light ...... 2-69 In Emergencies ...... 4-13 Manuals, Ordering ...... 8-1 1 Power ...... 4-12 Parts Identification Label ...... 6-61 Tips ...... 4-12 Publications, Ordering ...... 8-11 Wheel. Tilt ...... 2-34 Work, Doing Your Own ...... 6-2 Storage Compartments ...... 2-54 Service and Appearance Care ...... 6-1 Storage. Vehicle ...... 6-37 Service and Owner Publications ...... 8- 11 Storing the Flat Tire and Tools...... 5-35 Service Publications ...... 8- 11 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-36 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 1-27 Stuck: In Sand, Mud. Ice or Snow ...... 5-38 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 6-58 Sunvisors ...... 2-58 ShiftLever ...... 2-21 Sunroof ...... 2-59 Shift Lock Release6-13 ...... Engine 2-25 Supercharged shifting SuperchargerOil ...... 6-21 Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-2 1 How to Check and add Oil ...... 6-21 Into Park (P) ...... 2-27 What Kind of Oil to Use ...... 6-21 Out of Park ...... 2-30 When to Check ...... 6-21 Performance ...... 2-26 Supplemental Restraint System ...... 1-22 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...... 1-16 Symbols. Vehicle ...... v

9-10 Tachometer ...... 2-63 When to Check ...... 6-46 Taillamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-42 TopStrap ...... 1-58 TapePlayerCare ...... 3-31 Torque Lock ...... 2-30 Theft ...... 2-13 Torque. Wheel Nut ...... 5-34 Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player ...... 3-27 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-33 THEFTLOCK” ...... 3-27 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 5-8 Themostat ...... 6-30 Traction Control System ...... 4-9 TiltSteering Wheel ...... 2-34 Traction Control System Warning Light ...... 2-67 Time. Setting the ...... 3-10 Trailer Tire Chains ...... 6-51 Brakes ...... 4-37 TireLoading ...... 4-31 Driving on Grades ...... 4-39 Tire-Loading Information Label ...... 4-3 1 DrivingWith ...... 4-37 Tires ...... 6-44 Engine Cooling When Towing...... 4-40 Alignment and Balance ...... 6-50 FollowingDistance ...... 4-37 BuyingNew ...... 6-48 Hitches ...... 4-36 Chains ...... 6-51 Maintenance When Towing ...... 4-40 Changing a Flat ...... 5-27 MakingTurns ...... 4-38 Cleaning ...... 6-58 Parking on Hills ...... 4-39 Compact Spare ...... 5-37 Safety Chains ...... 4-36 Inflation ...... 6-45 Tongueweight ...... 4-35 Inflation Check ...... 7-14 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires ...... 4-36 Inspection and Rotation ...... 6-46 Towing ...... 4-33 Loading ...... 4-31 Turnsignals ...... 4-38 Pressure ...... 6-45 Weight ...... 4-35 Temperature ...... 6-50 Transaxle Fluid Traction ...... 6-49 Automatic ...... 6-22 Treadwear ...... 6-49 HowtoAdd ...... 6-26 Uniform Quality Grading ...... 6-49 How to Check ...... 6-22 Used Replacement Wheels ...... 6-51 When to Check and Change ...... 6-22 Wear Indicators ...... 6-47 Transportation Error Courtesy ...... 8-8 Wheel Replacement ...... 6-50 Trip Computer ...... 2.78.2.79 When It’s Time for New ...... 6-47 Trip Odometer ...... 2-63 9-11 Tr~nk...... 2-12 warning Devices ...... 5-2 Lock ...... 2-12 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators...... 2-64 Release. Remote ...... 2.9. 2. 12 WarrantyInformation ...... 8-10 Trunk Access Panel ...... 2-57 Washer Fluid. Adding ...... 6-32 Trunk Ajar Warning Light ...... 2-74 Washer Fluid. Windshield ...... 6-32 Trunk Mounted CD Changer ...... 3-24 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 6-56 "Y Users ...... 8-5 Weatherstrips ...... 6-56 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator ...... 2-35 Wheel Turn Signal On Chime ...... 2-35 Alignment ...... 6-50 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ...... 2-34 Nut Torque ...... 5-34 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer...... 4-38 Replacement ...... 6-50 Two-way Manual Front Seat ...... 1-2 Wrench ...... 5-29 Windows.Power ...... 2-33 WindshieldWasher ...... 2-37 Underbody Flushing Service ...... 7- 18 Underbody Maintenance 6-59 Fluid ...... 2-37. 6-32 ...... Fluid Level Check ...... 7-14 Underhood Electrical Center ...... 6-65 Windshield Wiper ...... 2-36 BladeReplacement ...... 6-44 Vehicle Fuses ...... 6-63 Control ...... 4-6 Winter Driving ...... 4-27 Damagewarnings ...... iv WiperBladeCheck ...... 7-15 Dimensions ...... 6-69 Wiring. Headlamp ...... 6-62 Identification Number ...... 6-61 Wrench. Wheel ...... 5-29 Loading ...... 4-31 Storage ...... 6-37 Symbols ...... v Ventilation System ...... 3-8 Visor Vanity Mirrors ...... 2-58 Visors. Sun ...... 2-58

9-12 1 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS (6,

:hes (280.7 c

Wheel Nuf Torque 100 1F Washer !l

For a More Detailed Look at moa Herease Vhat’s Under the Hood. 8 See Page 6-9 00 P#IdlO As? ...... :kout assisranc e dead-battery as: e out-of-fuel ass at-tire chana iourtesy Transportation-- - 3 1, c .i~.i..- ~~~~~ ~~~ .- E earing asafety belt correctlyis one of the most important thingsyou iectiol d your passengers can do. This section containsvery important ormation about safety belt usage, air bags andchild restraints.

,I; "C

, L ,. ~-Ac?lL One of the first things you'llprobably want todo when you getin your neb icle isadjust theseats. Depending on your vehicle, you may either be to do this manuallyor with power controls. I. != ,, .,.

Sectio EPLACEMENT BUMS

reamamps Lomposltt 9007

tear Stopflail and Turn Sianal CAPACITIES ANT) ~WCIFICATIC

Code

rostat Start, sn A A